Hyperion Planning

Oracle® Hyperion Planning Fusion Edition 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

y m

e d a

Student Guide

D63790GC11 Edition 1.1 October 2010 D69190

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or it affiliates. All rights reserved.

Author Theresa Songco

Disclaimer

Technical Contributors and Reviewers Emilya Altman Shankar Viswanathan Dave Falasco Ron Reiley Aline Goetz

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document, please report them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This document is not warranted to be error-free. Restricted Rights Notice

Editor Susan Moxley

If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the United States Government, the following notice is applicable:

Graphic Designer James Amitabh Hans Publisher Syed Imtiaz Ali

This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You may copy and print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or altered in any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without the express authorization of Oracle.

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS The U.S. Government’s rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are restricted by the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract. Trademark Notice Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

y m

e d a

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Table of Contents

0

Preface Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii Course Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii Course Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Student Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Activity Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Related Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Lesson 1: Introduction to Planning

y m

Oracle’s Enterprise Performance Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Information Delivery Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 EPM and BI Applications Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 BI Foundation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Planning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Planning Product Components Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Additional Products Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Planning Architecture Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Planning Adapters Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Foundation Services Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Shared Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Performance Management Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Smart View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Calculation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Essbase Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Administration Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Provider Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Essbase Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Reporting and Analysis Framework Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Web Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Oracle Business Intelligence Suite Enterprise Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

e d a

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Table of Contents

Lesson 2: Preparing the Installation Environment Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 EPM System Installation Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Preparing the Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Obtaining Third-Party Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Planning the Deployment Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Example 1: Single Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Example 2: Distributed Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Example 3: Virtual Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Classroom Architecture Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Preparing the Security Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 User Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Security API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Configuring SSL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Full Secure Socket Layer Deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 SSL Terminating at the Web Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 SSL Off-Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Two-Way SSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Preparing Web Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Supported Web Application Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Preparing Web Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Oracle HTTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Microsoft IIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Enabling Existing .NET 2.0 Framework (Windows 2003) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Preparing Web Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Preparing Server Disk Space and RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Preparing Client Disk Space and RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Default Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

y m

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Lesson 3: Preparing the Software Requirements

Selecting a Supported Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Operating Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Client Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Supported Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Products Requiring a Relational Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classroom Database Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

e l c

a r O iv

3-2 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-7 3-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Table of Contents

Accessing Oracle Software and Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Preparing the Required Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 Release Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 EPM System Certification Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 EPM System Software Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Preparing Third-Party Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Lesson 4: Installing Product Components EPM System Installer Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Installation Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Oracle HTTP Server Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Installing EPM System Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Reviewing System Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Specifying the Middleware Home Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Middleware Home Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 EPM Oracle Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Installation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Selecting an Installation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Selecting the Products to Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Confirming Your Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Reviewing the Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Performing Silent Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Recording Response Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Modifying Response Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Executing Response Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Installing Foundation Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Shared Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Performance Management Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Calculation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Installing Essbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Essbase Server and Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Administration Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Provider Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Essbase Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Installing Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Off-line Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

v

Table of Contents

Installing Reporting and Analysis Framework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framework Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Web Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting and Analysis Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Smart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-27 4-28 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-32 4-34

Lesson 5: Configuring Shared Services EPM System Configurator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Configuration Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Configuration Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Configuration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Configuring Products on a Single Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Configuring Products in a Distributed Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Configuring Products in an SSL-Enabled Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Configuring Products in a Clustered Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Performing Silent Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Recording Response Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Modifying Response Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Executing Response Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Running EPM System Configurator for Shared Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Configuring the Shared Services and Registry Database Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Shared Services Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Specifying Database Connection Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Configuring EPM System Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Deploying to the Application Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Registering with Oracle Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Setting the Shared Services Admin User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Configuring the Foundation Services Web Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Configuring External User Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Native Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 External Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Configuring MSAD or LDAP User Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Configuring MSAD or LDAP Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Configuring MSAD or LDAP Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Provisioning Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Available Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 Provisioning Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O vi

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Table of Contents

Deprovisioning Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 Generating Provisioning Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 Creating Application Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Lesson 6: Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager Configuring Performance Management Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Configuring the Performance Management Architect Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Deploying Performance Management Architect to the Application Server . . . . . . 6-5 Creating an Interface Datasource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Configuring Calculation Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Configuring the Calculation Manager Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Deploying Calculation Manager to the Application Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Lesson 7: Configuring Essbase Configuring Essbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Configuring the Essbase Studio and Administration Services Database. . . . . . . . 7-4 Deploying Administration Services and Provider Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Configuring the Essbase Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Externalizing Users in Administration Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Adding Essbase Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

y m

e d a

Lesson 8: Configuring Planning

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Configuring Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Separately Licensed Product Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Planning System Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deploying Planning to the Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Planning Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2 8-3 8-4 8-6 8-8

Lesson 9: Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace Configuring Financial Reporting and Web Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Configuring the Reporting and Analysis Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Configuring Reporting and Analysis Framework Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Deploying Reporting and Analysis to the Application Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Configuring Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Integrating Products with Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

vii

Table of Contents

Lesson 10: Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation Troubleshooting Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Reviewing Hardware and Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Checking Release Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Identifying Port Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Starting and Stopping EPM Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Running EPM System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Viewing and Analyzing Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Troubleshooting Product-Specific Issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Troubleshooting Shared Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Troubleshooting Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Troubleshooting Essbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Troubleshooting Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Troubleshooting Performance Management Architect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Contacting Oracle Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Lesson 11: Accessing Planning in Workspace

y m

Verifying the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2 Starting Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3 Logging On to Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5 Creating and Deploying Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6 Managing Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8 Creating Applications in Performance Management Architect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10 Creating Applications in Classic Application Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Creating Essbase Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Provisioning Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16 Provisioning for Shared Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-17 Provisioning for Performance Management Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-18 Provisioning for Calculation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-19 Provisioning for Essbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-19 Provisioning Users for Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-20 Provisioning for Reporting and Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-22 Configuring Smart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-24 Installing Smart View from Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-25 Accessing the Smart View Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-25 Types of Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-26 Connecting to Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-26

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O viii

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Table of Contents

Accessing Planning Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-27 Accessing Planning Applications in Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-28 Accessing Planning Applications in Smart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-30 Taking Forms Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-31 Accessing Planning Outlines in Administration Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-33

Lesson 12: Verifying the Reporting Installation Testing Financial Reporting Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Importing Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Managing Financial Reporting Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Exporting Reports to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Testing Web Analysis Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Using POV Definitions in Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Managing Web Analysis Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10

Lesson 13: Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

y m

Application Upgrade Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Step 1: Reviewing the Welcome Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Step 2: Reviewing the Application Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Step 3: Selecting Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Step 4: Reviewing the Upgrade Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Step 5: Viewing Job Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Step 6: Viewing Application Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Step 7: Accessing the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Lesson 14: Performing System Maintenance

Backup and Recovery Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assumed Knowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Backup Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backing Up Databases and File Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Backup Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File System Backup Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recovery Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backing Up Windows Registry Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

14-2 14-2 14-3 14-3 14-4 14-5 14-6 14-7 14-8

ix

Table of Contents

Backing Up and Recovering EPM System Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Workspace and Shared Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Essbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-11 Performance Management Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 Calculation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14 Smart View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14 Managing EPM System Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15 Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19

Lesson 15: Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management Lifecycle Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 Migrating on Connected and Disconnected Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4 LCM Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 LCM Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6 About Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 Planning Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 Performance Management Architect Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 Essbase Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11 Calculation Manager Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12 Foundation Services Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 Viewing and Searching for Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 Application and Artifact Migration Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17 Migration Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18 Migration Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19 Migrating Directly from One Application to Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21 Migrating Applications to a File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23 Migrating Applications from the File System to a Destination Application . . . . . 15-25 Exporting and Importing Individual Artifacts for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27 Automating Migration Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29 Running the Lifecycle Management Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30 Accessing and Viewing Migration Status Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32 Viewing Audit Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O x

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Table of Contents

Appendix A: Integrating with Planning Integration Options Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Outline Load Utility Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 Oracle Data Integrator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 Data Integration Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10 Financial Data Quality Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12 Enterprise Resource Planning Integrator Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13 Installing FDM and ERP Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15 Configuring FDM and ERP Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16 Configuring Web Server Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17 Configuring the Task Manager and Application Server Components . . . . . . . . . A-19 Configuring Load Balance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21 Configuring Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23 Working with FDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Creating FDM Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26 Installing Standard Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28 Copying Standard Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30 Installing the Essbase Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32 Connecting to Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34 Working with ERP Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36 Creating the ERP Integrator Master Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37 Creating Logical Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 Creating Data Servers and Physical Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Creating Contexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40 Configuring the ERP Integrator Work Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41 Creating a Physical Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41 Importing Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42 Accessing ERP Integrator in Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43 Registering an ERP Integrator Source System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44

y m

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Appendix B: Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator Performance Management Architect File Generator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Import File from Planning Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Import File from Performance Management Architect Applications . . . . . Creating an Import File from Microsoft Excel Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

e l c

B-2 B-4 B-6 B-8

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

xi

Table of Contents

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O xii

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Preface

0

Welcome to Oracle® Hyperion Planning Fusion Edition 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration. Before you begin, please take a moment to review this section. The preface presents an overview of the following information: • Course objectives • Structure of the course • Course materials used in the class • Conventions used in the book

y m

• Additional resources to enhance your learning

e d a

• Relevant follow-up courses that you might want to attend

Course Objectives After completing this course, you should be able to:

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

• Identify the Planning installation requirements • Install and configure Planning

Course Structure

Oracle® Hyperion Planning Fusion Edition 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration is a 3-day, instructor-led training course consisting of lectures, demonstrations, and hands-on exercises. In this course, the instructor presents a topic, and guides you through the exercises. Demonstrations and hands-on exercises reinforce the concepts and skills introduced during lectures.

a r O

e l c

Preface

Course Materials You use two books in class—the student guide and the activity guide. The instructor may also give you handouts.

Student Guide The student guide contains lessons. Each lesson begins with a list of objectives followed by the presentation of slides and accompanying text. The lesson ends with a summary of the topics covered in the lesson. The student guide contains appendices of material related to the course.

Activity Guide The activity guide has two sections—exercises and exercise solutions. • Exercises—A critical part of the learning process is the challenge of completing real tasks associated with each lesson. Each exercise is an opportunity to apply your knowledge. • Exercise Solutions—The exercise solutions present the detailed steps to complete the exercises.

y m

Conventions The following text conventions are used in this course book:

e d a

c A

• Text to be entered, options to be selected, names of files and modules, and menu selections are displayed in bold type. Examples:

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

- Select Clear Profile.

- Click YES to clear the profile.

• When available, figures are used to identify an object or task. Example: Click Edit

.

• Keyboard shortcuts are displayed as follows: Click OK or press Alt+O. • Alerts are used to direct your attention to different types of information.

e l c

a r O xiv

NOTE: A note provides related information, common mistakes, or cautions about the current topic.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Preface

TIP: A tip provides information that helps you work more efficiently.

Additional Resources Use the following resources to enhance your learning: • Product documentation on the Oracle Technology Network: http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/epm.html • Oracle Learning Library: http://apex.oracle.com/pls/apex/f?p=OTNCR:1:0 Oracle provides the following user assistance with Enterprise Performance Management products: • Context-sensitive help—Click Help for context-sensitive help. • Help menu—From the Help menu in the software, access screen-level help, general product help, technical support, EPM documentation, oracle.com, and optionally Oracle User Productivity Kit.

y m

• My Oracle Support—Access release-specific Readme files.

e d a

• E-Delivery—Access release-specific installation documentation before downloading software.

c A

• Oracle Technology Network—Explore product documentation, get started with Java, PHP, Linux, and other industry-standard technologies, download free software, and read technical articles and notes authored by OTN members. You can also join discussion forums to request advice from Oracle engineers and other OTN members; listen to podcast interviews with Oracle engineers, customers, and partners; bookmark Technology and Developer Centers devoted to your area of interest; and subscribe to Developer e-mail newsletters.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• OTN Documentation Library—Download documentation for all Enterprise Performance Management products, including reference information and PDF and HTML versions of each deliverable.

Related Courses

The following courses are available:

e l c

• Oracle Hyperion Planning 11.1.2: Create & Manage Applications

a r O

• Oracle Essbase 11.1.2 Bootcamp

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

xv

Preface

NOTE: Course names and learner paths may change. Visit www.oracle.com/education for the latest information.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O xvi

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

1

Introduction to Planning

1

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Describe Oracle's Enterprise Performance Management System • Describe Planning • Describe Foundation Services • Describe Essbase

y m

• Describe Reporting and Analysis

e d a

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Oracle’s Enterprise Performance Management System Information Delivery

EPM and BI Applications

BI Foundation

y m

Copy right © 2010, Orac le and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Oracle’s Enterprise Performance Management System

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Oracle’s Enterprise Performance Management System (EPM System) is a complete, open, and integrated system that supports a broad range of analytic requirements. It includes three layers of capabilities—information delivery, EPM and business intelligence (BI) applications, and a common BI foundation.

Information Delivery Layer

This layer provides a complete set of information delivery and access capabilities, which are designed to address the needs of different types of users in an organization. These capabilities include interactive dashboards for executives and managers, ad hoc analysis tools for power users, Microsoft Office interfaces for finance users, and pixel-perfect reports and mobile support for casual users.

e l c

a r O 1-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

EPM and BI Applications Layer This layer includes an integrated suite of market-leading performance management applications that are based on the Hyperion product suite. The applications address key strategic and financial performance management processes, including strategy management, planning and forecasting, financial close and reporting, and profitability management. This layer also includes integrated BI applications that can help users analyze data from enterprise resource planning (ERP) and customer relationship management (CRM) applications, as well as support industry-specific requirements.

BI Foundation The EPM and BI applications are integrated on a BI foundation that includes the following: • Common enterprise information model • Powerful, forward-looking analytics with Oracle© Essbase • Ability to integrate data from Oracle and non–Oracle databases and transactional systems

y m

• Enterprise dimension management application, which provides a single point of management for dimensions and hierarchies across EPM, BI, data warehouse, and other applications

e d a

c A

• Predictive analytics engine, which integrates BI with business processes

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

The BI foundation also leverages key technologies from Oracle Fusion Middleware, such as data integration, identity management, and process management.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

1-3

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Planning Overview Planning has the following features: • Multidimensional data structure • • • • • • •

Target setting and bottom-up planning Iterative planning cycles Modeling with complex business rules and allocations Accessible on the Web or Smart View Management of the planning cycle Currency conversion for multicurrency applications Metadata and data integration with other systems Copy right © 2010, Orac le and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Planning Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

Planning is an Excel and Web-based budgeting and planning solution that drives collaborative, event-based, operational planning processes through the organization for a wide range of financial and operational needs. Planners have the flexibility to adapt rapidly to changes in direction, ensuring that plans are always current, relevant, and functional. Decision makers and managers can communicate the course of action and collaborate with budget holders to optimize the planning process. Planning provides ease of use and deployment through the Web or Oracle® Hyperion Smart View for Office, Fusion Edition. Powered by Essbase, Planning uses a multidimensional data structure for flexible data collection and analysis. With Planning, you can integrate metadata and data with other external systems.

e l c

a r O

Planning also supports driver-based plans that are based on global assumptions, such as interest rates and head count.

1-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Planning Product Components Overview • •

Foundation Services Performance Management Architect

• • •

Calculation Manager Smart View Workspace

• • •

Planning Offline Planning Essbase Reporting and Analysis

y m

Copy right © 2010, Orac le and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Planning Product Components Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Your organization can access deployed Planning applications through the Web client. To extend the power and flexibility of Planning, you use it with other Hyperion products. The following product components are delivered with Planning: • Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installer • Oracle® Hyperion Foundation Services

• Oracle® Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management Architect, Fusion Edition • Oracle® Hyperion Calculation Manager

• Oracle® Hyperion Smart View, Fusion Edition

e l c

• Oracle® Enterprise Performance Management Workspace, Fusion Edition

a r O

• Oracle® Hyperion Planning, Fusion Edition and Offline Planning • Oracle® Essbase and Oracle Essbase Clients

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

1-5

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

• Hyperion Reporting and Analysis Framework • Oracle® Hyperion Financial Reporting, Fusion Edition • Hyperion® Web Analysis

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 1-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Additional Products Overview • •

Workforce Planning Capital Asset Planning

• • •

Public Sector Budgeting Strategic Finance Financial Management

•

Financial Data Quality Management

Enterprise Performance Management Solutions D as hboarding and Sc orecarding Modeling

Planning, Budgeting, and Forecasting

Copy right © 2010, Orac le and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Additional Products Overview

y m

Cons olidating and Reporting

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Several complementary Hyperion products are integrated with Planning, completing the Enterprise Performance Management solutions. • Oracle® Hyperion Workforce Planning, Fusion Edition—Handle workforce, salary, and compensation planning • Oracle® Hyperion Capital Asset Planning, Fusion Edition—Plan for new asset purchases and existing asset actions • Oracle® Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting, Fusion Edition— Prepare and maintain a comprehensive budget that includes position budgeting for personnel services, general operating, and capital budget components

e l c

• Oracle® Hyperion Strategic Finance, Fusion Edition—Test financial models, create contingency plans, and form alternative strategies

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

1-7

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

• Oracle® Hyperion Financial Management, Fusion Edition—Consolidate results, reduce the cost of regulatory reporting, and gain important insights into performance • Hyperion® Web Analysis—Transform data into insightful information through easyto-use, highly graphical displays and robust analytics • Oracle® Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Fusion Edition— Integrate and validate Planning with financial data from external source systems

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 1-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Planning Architecture Overview Client

Server

Java application server

Web server

Services

Data

RDBMS

External Services

ODI/ERPI

Essbase cube

Legacy, ERP Systems

Copy right © 2010, Orac le and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Planning Architecture Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

Planning is a multitier application that combines the advantages of Essbase (a multidimensional database) and a relational database to optimize performance and maintenance. Client Tier The client tier contains Workspace, Smart View, Administration Services Console, Essbase Studio, Web Analysis Studio, and Financial Reporting Studio. You access Planning applications, Performance Management Architect applications, and reports through Workspace. Planning administrators and users enter data, perform process management, manage users and security, launch business rules, copy versions, develop data forms, and perform other administrative tasks on the client tier.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

1-9

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Server Tier The server application tier consists primarily of the following: • Java application and Web servers: - Shared Services - Performance Management Architect - Calculation Manager - Administration Services - Provider Services - Workspace - Financial Reporting - Web Analysis - Planning

y m

NOTE: The Web server can be on a separate machine or on the same machine as the Planning application server. The Web server enables you to access Planning applications from a Web client through a Web browser. The Web server uses Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) as the communications protocol.

e d a

• Services

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

- Shared Services

- Performance Management Architect - Calculation Manager - Workspace - Essbase

- Essbase Studio

- Financial Reporting

e l c

a r O 1-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Data Tier The data tier consists of relational database management systems (RDBMS) and Essbase. The following products require a repository database: • Shared Services • Performance Management Architect • Calculation Manager • Reporting and Analysis Framework • Essbase Administration Services • Planning Planning requires a system database and a database for each deployed application. The Planning application database is used primarily to store the application’s definition. In addition, the following information is stored in the RDBMS: • Application framework* • Dimensions, dimension members, and properties*

y m

• Exchange rates*

e d a

• Member access (security filters)* • Data form design definitions • Planning units • Annotations (planning unit, account, and cell text)

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

• Supporting details

• Workflow and task lists • Audit tracking and logs • Business rules • Allocations

• Copy versions

• Specialized modules

e l c

NOTE: Items with an asterisk (*) are updated to the Essbase databases during application refreshes.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

1-11

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

The Essbase database stores the following information: • Security • Planning data and metadata • Calculation scripts

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 1-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Planning Adapters Overview • •

Oracle Data Integrator Financial Data Quality Management

y m

Copy right © 2010, Orac le and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Planning Adapters Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You can connect and integrate Planning with any database through the Oracle Data Integrator (ODI) Adapter for Planning or the Financial Data Quality Management (FDM) Adapter for Planning. Adapters are predefined software components that communicate with various source and target applications. Each adapter is programmed to integrate with a specific source or target system. Oracle Data Integrator After installing ODI, you can perform the following tasks to integrate Planning with an external data source:

e l c

• Defining data servers—You define data servers for connecting to a Planning server in the Topology Manager. When defining data server connections, you specify a connection name, the technology used, the server host and port address, user name, and password.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

1-13

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

• Defining physical and logical schemas—You can define physical schemas corresponding to a Planning application and logical schemas on which models are based for each defined data server. After defining physical and logical schemas, you create a context to link the two schemas. • Reverse-engineering Planning applications—You reverse-engineer Planning applications through the Reverse-engineering Knowledge Module (RKM) to create an Oracle Data Integrator model that includes a data store for each dimension in the application. The RKM connects to the application, determined by the logical schema and context, and imports a data store for each dimension in the application and a data store called UDA for UDA loading. • Creating interfaces for data stores—You can use the imported data stores as interface targets for loading data and metadata into a Planning application. • Chaining interfaces into packages—You can chain interfaces into packages to consolidate a set of processes that you need to run. • Loading data and metadata—Planning applications are structured with dimensions and dimension members. Before you can load data values for members, you must first load metadata. You can load members only to dimensions that exist in Planning. You must use a separate interface for each dimension that you load. After loading dimension members, you must refresh the Essbase database to reflect your changes. After updating the Essbase database, you can run interfaces to load data into Planning.

y m

e d a

c A

The Oracle Data Integrator uses the following interfaces to perform tasks: • Topology Manager—enables you to define server connections.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Designer—enables you to define data stores, and load data and metadata into data stores. Financial Data Quality Management Financial Data Quality Management (FDM) is a Web-based solution that helps finance users to develop standardized financial data management processes. Its data preparation server can ease integration and validation of financial data from any source system. To further reduce data integration costs and data mapping complexities, FDM includes EPM System adapters for a variety of source and target systems.

e l c

a r O 1-14

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

You can use FDM to feed source-level financial data into Planning. Refer to Appendix B: Installing and Configuring Financial Data Quality Management for more information on: • Running the installation • Configuring FDM components • Creating applications • Installing the Planning adapter • Connecting to Planning applications

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

1-15

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Foundation Services Overview

Shared Services

Performance Management Architect

Workspace

Calculation Manager

Smart View

Copy right © 2010, Orac le and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Foundation Services Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

Foundation Services is a modular suite of integrated applications that support a common workspace and a common security and metadata management, enabling a single point of maintenance for efficient management and ownership services. The suite provides a consistent source of information and change control across the enterprise through centralized application and application group management, user and group provisioning, and data integration tools.

Shared Services

Shared Services integrates Hyperion products to provide user provisioning, life cycle management, and task flow management. It also provides the Shared Services Registry, a central repository that simplifies product configuration by storing and reusing information for most installed Hyperion products.

e l c

a r O 1-16

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Performance Management Architect Performance Management Architect is a feature set in Planning that enables you to manage, create, and deploy Hyperion applications within one interface. Using the Data Synchronization feature in Performance Management Architect, you can create data movement synchronizations between Hyperion applications, data mappings for reuse, and flat file and staging area mappings to import data into Hyperion applications.

Workspace Workspace is the Web-based common user interface for Hyperion products. It enables users to work with Hyperion-authored content that is created with Reporting and Analysis and with third-party documents such as Microsoft Word and Excel files. You access Planning through Workspace. Workspace has the following key features: • Dynamic HTML (DHTML), zero footprint client • File system paradigm to access content

y m

• Interface for common Reporting and Analysis administration task

e d a

• Access point for Performance Scorecard

• Support for Reporting and Analysis authoring studios and third-party documents

Smart View

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

You can use Smart View to enter and analyze data in Microsoft Office. Smart View provides integration with Microsoft Office, not only for Planning but also for Financial Management, Essbase, Web Analysis, Financial Reporting, Interactive Reporting, and SQR Production Reporting. Tasks that previously were repeated across products are now performed only once. Tight integration with Smart View enables you to perform the following tasks: • Import content into Microsoft Excel, Word, PowerPoint, and Outlook • Use Office smart tags to add single data values and import reports • Distribute and share Office documents by logging on only once to the data source

e l c

• Expose functions for Financial Management and Essbase Analytics content in Word, PowerPoint, and Outlook

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

1-17

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Calculation Manager Calculation Manager is a calculation engine of Performance Management Architect that enables you to create, validate, and launch complex calculations that you can use in your Planning application. It provides a graphical interface for ease of use. Here are the types of objects that can be calculated in Calculation Manager: • Rules containing different calculations that are grouped in components • Rule sets containing rules that can be calculated simultaneously or sequentially • Components containing formulas, scripts, conditions, ranges, and loops

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 1-18

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Essbase Overview • •

Essbase server Essbase client

• • •

Administration Services Provider Services Essbase Studio

y m

Copy right © 2010, Orac le and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Essbase Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Essbase is a multithreaded online analytical processing (OLAP) database software using symmetric multiprocessing hardware platforms. It is based on a Web-deployable, thinclient architecture. Components of Essbase:

• Essbase server acts as a shared resource, handling all data storage, caching, calculations, and data security. • The following Essbase client components enable you to connect to the Essbase server and perform administrative and analytic tasks on server objects. - Spreadsheet Add-in is a software program that merges seamlessly with Microsoft Excel. By using Spreadsheet Add-in, you can access Essbase data and perform ad hoc reporting on analytic databases.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

1-19

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

- MaxL DDL is a multidimensional database definition language for Essbase. You make requests to Essbase by using English-like statements rather than commands. - Data Mining, an optional product component of Essbase, shows you hidden relationships and patterns in your data. You can plug in various data mining algorithms, build models, and apply them to Essbase applications and databases. Planning uses Essbase to store dimension hierarchies and consolidate data.

Administration Services Administration Services is the robust, cross-platform framework for managing and maintaining Essbase. It provides a single point of access for viewing, managing, and maintaining Essbase servers and Administration servers. Components of Administration Services: • Administration Services server provides access to Essbase through Essbase Administration Services Console. • Essbase Administration Services Console provides wizards, editors, dynamic menus and other tools to help you implement, monitor, and maintain Essbase solutions.

y m

e d a

After deploying a Planning application, you can review the resulting Essbase application in Essbase Administration Services Console.

Provider Services

c A

Provider Services is a middle-tier data source provider to Essbase for Java API, Smart View, and XMLA clients. Provider Services supports highly concurrent analytical scenarios and provides scalability and reliability in a distributed Web-enabled enterprise environment.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Essbase Studio

Essbase Studio simplifies cube construction by delivering a single environment for performing tasks related to data modeling, cube designing, and analytic application construction. With a wizard-driven user interface, Essbase Studio supports modeling of the various data source types from which Essbase applications are typically built. With a wizard-driven user interface, Essbase Studio supports modeling various data source types from which Essbase applications are typically built, making it a single point from which all cube-related data modeling can be performed.

e l c

a r O 1-20

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

A common metadata repository captures all metadata related to all Essbase applications allowing the reuse of metadata at the lowest level of granularity. The repository gives contains the common metadata shared across the various applications enterprise-wide. Essbase Studio supports lineage tracking through a rich graphical view of the metadata relationships, allowing users to follow application lineages to their metadata components and data sources.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

1-21

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Reporting and Analysis Framework Overview

Financial Reporting

Web Analysis

y m

Copy right © 2010, Orac le and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Reporting and Analysis Framework Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Planning leverages Foundation Services and Reporting and Analysis modules to integrate data from multiple sources; and provide dashboards, reporting, and analysis. You access Reporting and Analysis through Web clients and Windows clients. Web clients are built on J2EE technology and consist of the following Web applications: • Workspace Web application—This application is the container for Web applications. • Shared Services Web application—This application is a foundation for Hyperion products. You can access Shared Services through its own Web interface.

e l c

a r O 1-22

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Windows clients consist of the following applications: • Authoring studios—Each reporting tool provides a Windows application for developing specialized reports. • Administration Services Console—Essbase provides management and data analysis engines for its multidimensional database. You can access Essbase through Administration Services and the Administration Services Console. The following table lists Reporting and Analysis modules and their features: Module

Features

Financial Reporting

Specialized financial reporting module with predefined formatting and built-in financial intelligence that enables users to quickly assemble and publish report books for management control and regulatory fillings

Web Analysis

Front-end analysis tool that enables users to explore business data for growth and profit opportunities, uncover emerging problems, and test solutions before using them

Essbase

Essbase Analytics: Enterprise analytic infrastructure for financial analysis, spending analysis, customer behavior analysis, product profitability, or workforce analysis

y m

Aggregate Storage Mode: Real-time analytical engine with data scalability to support enterprise analysis

e d a

Interactive Reporting

Query and reporting tool with Web-enabled dashboard interface and ability to secure content based on different users

SQR Production Reporting

Reporting tool that generates and manages large-volume reports, and allows users to distribute reports to diverse audiences over the Web

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

In this class, you install Financial Reporting and Web Analysis.

Financial Reporting

Oracle Hyperion products support multiple types of reporting and analysis through a personalized, intuitive, and interactive thin-client workspace. With Financial Reporting, you can graphically design and present analytic data. You can design traditional financial report formats, such as cash management reports, profit and loss statements, and balance sheets. You can also design nontraditional formats for financial or analytic data that includes text and graphics.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

1-23

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

The following are key features of Financial Reporting: • Flexible range of output options • Scalable, cross-platform, server-based report generation • Graphical, object-based, report creation with simultaneous access to multiple Hyperion data sources • Objects that are reusable across multiple reports • Book creation for similar reports • Dynamic scheduling that enables automated reporting

Web Analysis Web Analysis provides a Web interface for advanced report design. The interface offers drag-and-drop tools to create personalized reports for a broad range of analytic applications, such as sales analysis, product profitability, key performance management, and dashboards. Web Analysis interacts with data stores from Essbase, Financial Management, Planning, and relational databases.

Oracle Business Intelligence Suite Enterprise Edition

y m

e d a

Oracle Business Intelligence Suite Enterprise Edition Plus (Oracle BI EE Plus) is a comprehensive suite of enterprise BI products that delivers a full range of analysis and reporting capabilities. Featuring a unified, highly scalable, modern architecture, Oracle BI EE Plus provides intelligence and analytics from data spanning enterprise sources and applications—empowering the largest communities with complete and relevant insight.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Oracle BI EE Plus bundles key Oracle Hyperion reporting products for integrated reporting with Oracle Hyperion financial applications.

e l c

a r O 1-24

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Describe Oracle's Enterprise Performance Management System • Describe Planning • Describe Foundation Services • Describe Essbase • Describe Reporting and Analysis

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

1-25

Lesson 1

Introduction to Planning

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 1-26

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

2

Preparing the Installation Environment

2

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • List the items required for the installation environment • Compare installation architecture options • Identify the supported user directories • Describe the supported SSL configurations

y m

• Identify the supported Web application servers • Identify the supported Web servers

e d a

• Name the supported Web browsers

c A

• Identify the server disk space and RAM requirements • Identify the client disk space and RAM requirements

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• List the default ports used by the EPM System software

a r O

e l c

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Installation Overview An EPM System installation typically follows this workflow: 1. Plan the installation and perform the prerequisite tasks. 2. Ensure that the installation environment meets the system requirements. 3. Prepare the installation files. 4. Install EPM System products. 5. Configure EPM System products. 6. Confirm that EPM System services are started. 7. Validate the installation using Oracle's Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Diagnostics. 8. Perform required post-configuration tasks for the products that you installed. 9. Enable external authentication and provision users. Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Installation Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installer, Fusion Edition installs components on three tiers: • Client tier • Services tier

• Web tier, which includes the Java Application Server tier and the Web server tier Additionally, when you configure EPM System products, you set up databases on a data tier.

e l c

a r O 2-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

EPM System Installation Workflow An EPM System Installation typically follows the workflow described in the guides noted in the following table: Task

Reference

Plan the installation and perform prerequisite tasks.

“Installation Planning Checklist” in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Start Here

Meet the system requirements

Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Certification Matrix (http://www.oracle.com/technology/products/bi/ hyperion-supported-platforms.html)

Prepare the installation files

Chapter 2, “Preparing for Installation”, in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Release 11.1.2 Installation and Configuration Guide

Install EPM System products

Chapter 3, “Installing EPM System Products”, in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Release 11.1.2 Installation and Configuration Guide

Configure EPM System products

Chapter 4, “Configuring EPM System Products”, in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Release 11.1.2 Installation and Configuration Guide

Confirm that EPM System services are started

e d a

c A

Chapter 6, “Starting and Stopping EPM System Products”, in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Release 11.1.2 Installation and Configuration Guide

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Validate the installation using Oracle’s Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Diagnostics

Chapter 7, “Validating the Installation”, in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Release 11.1.2 Installation and Configuration Guide

Perform any required postconfiguration tasks

Chapter 8, “Performing Post-configuration Tasks”, in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Release 11.1.2 Installation and Configuration Guide

Enable external authentication and proivision users

Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System User and Role Security Guide

(Optional) Complete your SSL implementation

Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System User and Role Security Guide

e l c

a r O

y m

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-3

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Installation Checklist • •

Preparing the work area Obtaining third-party licenses

• • •

Preparing software Gathering required documentation Preparing the hardware

• • •

Preparing databases Preparing the security infrastructure Setting up Web application servers and Web servers

• •

Resolving ports Preparing for product configuration

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Installation Checklist

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Use the Installation checklist to prepare for installing Hyperion products. To ensure a smoother, faster installation, Oracle recommends that you review the checklist at least one week prior to installation. If your company is working with a consultant, Oracle recommends reviewing the checklist several weeks prior to installation. Refer to Chapter 3, “Installation Planning Checklist” in the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance System Installation Start Here Guide. The succeeding topics and lesson discuss sections of the Installation Checklist.

e l c

a r O 2-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Preparing the Work Area

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Preparing the Work Area

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Complete the following tasks to prepare the work area before the installation consultants arrive: • Ensure that the work area has a direct connection to the internet outside the corporate firewall • Verify that the workstation can connect to Oracle’s E-Delivery site • Obtain license keys for third-party products, such as Java application servers.

Obtaining Third-Party Licenses

The following third-party products may require license keys or license files. Requesting and receiving a license key can take several days:

e l c

a r O

• Operating systems • Database repositories

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-5

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

• Java application servers • Web servers • Microsoft Office • Adobe Acrobat Distiller For Java application servers, consider which type of license works best for your organization. For example, a license for a lower level of functionality might meet your needs.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 2-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Planning the Deployment Architecture

Oracle Hyperion Planning and product components

Data sources

Third-party software

Web application and Web servers

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Planning the Deployment Architecture

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You can configure Planning in various architecture designs. Server specifications depend on factors such as number of users, business process, size, design, and complexity of your Planning applications. You should analyze factors relevant to your environment as you plan your deployment. Oracle highly recommends a distributed configuration.

Example 1: Single Installation

A single-server configuration, which combines the server and data tier on one machine, is recommended for a development environment or for customers who are implementing a very limited number of users.

e l c

All EPM System products can be installed on a single server. However, you must install and configure a relational database management system (RDBMS) before configuring EPM System products.

a r O

Oracle highly recommends installing the RDBMS on a separate machine. Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-7

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Example 2: Distributed Environment

Dom ain Manager

Plann ing

Clien t So ftware (including

User Director y

Offline Planning)

Fou ndation Services

Web Bro wser

Datab ase Ser ver

Repo rting an d Analysis

Essbase

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Example 2: Distributed Environment

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You can install the EPM System products for Planning on a distributed environment. The slide illustrates the following sample installation distribution: 1. Server 1—Domain Manager, User Directory, Foundation Services (Shared Services, Workspace, Performance Management Architect, Calculation Manager) 2. Server 2—Database Server (RDBMS) 3. Server 3—Essbase server 4. Server 4—Planning

5. Server 5—Reporting and Analysis

e l c

6. Client (including the Web browser and Offline Planning)

a r O 2-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

If necessary, you can combine or add more servers, and the numbers depend on the following factors: • Application sizes • Number of users • Frequency of concurrent use by multiple users • Your organization high availability requirements • Your organization's security requirements EPM System Installer simplifies the task of installing components in a distributed computing environment. You can install, configure, and validate any components you want on any computer. After installing, configuring, and validating the components on one machine, you can repeat the process on another machine. You can deploy Planning applications to multiple servers. Here are benefits of mulitpleserver deployment: • Increased support for applications that have a large user load

y m

• Failover capabilities for any system, regardless of size Note the following information about installation in a distributed environment:

e d a

• You install Shared Services on only one machine in the deployment.

c A

• Although you can install products in any order, you must follow a configuring sequence on a distributed environment. You must configure Shared Services first for other products to be configured successfully.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• EPM Oracle home must be the same on each machine. For example, if the path is /Oracle/Middleware on the first configured machine, the path must be the same on all machines in the deployment. • If you are using WebLogic:

- On the machine on which you install the WebLogic Server, you must install (but not configure) all Web applications for all applications you plan to deploy on any machine in the environment. - On each additional machine, you must install only the Web applications you plan to run on that machine, and then use EPM System Configurator to configure them.

e l c

- Run application deployment on each machine you install EPM System products but only run Web server deployment on the machine you configure Shared Services.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-9

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

• You must deploy all Web applications in an EPM System deployment on either all Windows machines or on all UNIX machines. • If you are installing in multiple environments (for example, Development, Test, and Production), install Foundation Services products in each environment.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 2-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Example 3: Virtual Environment 1

Virtual Machine 1

Vir tu al Mach ine 2

Clien t So ftware

Dom ain Manager

O ther O racle H yperion App lications

Web Bro wser

User Director y Fo undation Ser vices

2

3

Virtual Machi ne 1

Vir tu al Machine 2

Planning

R ep orting and An alysis

Virtual Machine 1 Database Ser ver

Offline Plannin g

Virtual Machine 2 Essbase

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Example 3: Virtual Environment

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Virtual environments are a commercially reasonable solution for companies that need to work within a budget. They function like distributed environments, so you have flexibility of installing EPM System products in several virtual servers. The slide displays an example of a Planning installation on a distributed virtual environment: 1. Server 1—contains two virtual machines:

a. Virtual Machine 1—Domain Manager, User Directory, Foundation Services (Shared Services, Workspace, Performance Management Architect, Calculation Manager)

e l c

b. Virtual Machine 2—Other Oracle Hyperion applications

a r O

2. Server 2—contains two virtual machines: a. Virtual Machine 1—Planning

b. Virtual Machine 2—Reporting and Analysis

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-11

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

3. Server 3—contains two virtual machines a. Database Server (RDBMS) b. Essbase 4. Client (including the Web browser and Offline Planning) Although Oracle does not directly support installing EPM System products in a virtual environment, Oracle Support will assist customers running EPM System products on third-party virtualized environments with the following considerations: • When a customer logs a previously unreported issue, Oracle Support may require the issue to be diagnosed in a non-virtualized environment when there is reason to believe that the virtual environment is a contributing factor. Oracle Support may refer customers to the third-part virtualization vendor for issues that can not be duplicated in non-virtualized environments. • When a problem was previously reported and a resolution is available, Oracle Support recommends the appropriate solution on the non-virtualized operating system (OS). If that solution does not work in the virtual environment, the customer is referred to its virtualization software vendor for support. If the customer demonstrates that the Oracle solution does not work when running on a non-virtualized OS, Oracle resumes support, including logging a bug with Oracle Development for investigation if required.

y m

e d a

While Oracle’s EPM System products are expected to function properly in virtual environments, performance implications may invalidate typical sizing recommendations. Therefore, we recommend that you analyze and mitigate hosted applications to prevent degradation of performance and scalability, particularly under peak load.

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 2-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Classroom Architecture Overview

Controller PC1

Domain Manager, MSAD, Oracle database

Controller PC2

Domain Manager, MSAD, Oracle database

Installer PCs

EPM System Installation Software

Installer PCs

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Classroom Architecture Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

EPM System Installation Software

c A

The diagram on the slide displays the configuration of the classroom environment. The architecture consists of the following servers: • Installer PCs—contain the EPM System installation software. Students will install all EPM System products on their desktops. The required Web application servers are included in the installation. • Controller PCs—serve as the domain manager that also hosts the external directory used for EPM System Single Sign-On (SSO). It hosts the Oracle 11g database.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-13

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Preparing the Security Infrastructure •

User Authentication – Security API – Native Directory – External Directories

•

Administrator Accounts

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Preparing the Security Infrastructure

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Perform the following actions to prepare your security infrastructure for the installation: • Collect the information needed to configure external user directories in Shared Services. • For each server, prepare a user account with Administrator rights. The installation can be a local administrator account. • Create domain accounts

• Prepare a service account for external authentication against the user directory that you are using.

e l c

• If you are using secure communication, ensure availability of Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificates for all components. Oracle recommends using SSL for EPM System product installations.

a r O 2-14

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

User Authentication User authentication enables SSO functionality across Hyperion products by validating the login information of each user. User authentication, along with product-specific authorization, grants the user access to Oracle's Hyperion products. Authorization is granted through provisioning. User directories refer to any corporate user and identity management system compatible with Shared Services. Hyperion products are supported on a large number of user directories. Native Directory Native Directory refers to the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)-enabled user directory that Shared Services uses to support provisioning. External Directories The following are supported external user directories: • Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)-enabled user directories, such as Oracle Internet Directory

y m

• Sun Java System Directory Service 6.3

e d a

• Microsoft Active Directory (MSAD) 2003 and 2008 • IBM Tivoli Director Server 6.2 • Novell eDirectory 8.8 • Computer Associates Siteminder 6

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

• Relational databases (Oracle database 10.2.0.04 and later, IBM DBs 9.1 and 9.5, Microsoft SQL Server 2005 and 2008) In this class, you connect to an MSAD external directory. Please consult your instructor for your student user ID.

Security API

The Security Application Programming Interface (Security API) is the main interface to validate users and interpret user access to Oracle's Hyperion products.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-15

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Configuring SSL •

Full SSL Deployment (including data access)

• • •

SSL Terminating at the Web Server SSL Accelerators (Off-loading) Two-way SSL

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring SSL

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

If you are using secure communication, ensure availability of Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificates for all components. Oracle recommends using SSL for Hyperion product installations. If you are configuring EPM System products for SSL, the configuration sequence and selections that you make during configuration depend on the type of SSL implementation you select. For more information, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide. EPM System supports the following types of SSL configuration: • Full SSL Deployment (including data access)

e l c

• SSL Terminating at the Web Server • SSL Accelerators (Off-loading)

a r O

• Two-way SSL

2-16

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Full Secure Socket Layer Deployment

Bro wser connects to https://epm .mycompan y.co m

EPM System configured with https://epminternal.mycompany.com Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Full Secure Socket Layer Deployment

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

In full SSL mode, communication across all securable channels is secured using SSL. This is the most secure EPM System deployment scenario. NOTE: You cannot enabled SSL for all EPM System products; for example, backend servers such as Essbase Server, Strategic Finance Server, and Financial Management Server.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-17

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

The following process outlines the steps that you need to complete to configure an EPM System for full SSL. For specific information about these steps, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System User and Role Security Guide. 1. Install the EPM System products. 2. SSL-enable the database and database client. See your database documentation for detailed procedures. 3. Add server aliases on the Web server. 4. If you are not using certificates from a known third-party CA, prepare EPM System Configurator by importing the required root certificates. You must import CA root certificates into each server where EPM System products are installed. 5. Using EPM System Configurator, configure and deploy EPM System products. You must select the required SSL settings before deploying the Web components to the application server. 6. Configure EPM System Web components for SSL communication. 7. Configure the Web server (Oracle HTTP Server) for SSL communication. Configure Oracle HTTP Server for redirection to IIS. Redirection from Oracle HTTP Server to IIS is automatically performed by EPM System Configurator.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 2-18

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

SSL Terminating at the Web Server

Bro wser connects to https://epm .mycompan y.co m

EPM System configured with https://epminternal.mycompany.com Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

SSL Terminating at the Web Server

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

In this scenario, SSL is used to secure the communication link between EPM System clients (for example, a browser) and Oracle HTTP Server. Often in this configuration, the Web server and everything beyond is protected by a firewall. The following process outlines the steps that you need to complete to configure an EPM System for SSL terminating at the Web server. For specific information about these steps, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System User and Role Security Guide. 1. Install the EPM System products.

2. Add server aliases on the Web Server and enable SSL for Oracle HTTP Server.

e l c

3. Install Oracle HTTP Server certificates.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-19

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

4. If you are not using certificates from a known third-party CA, prepare EPM System Configurator by importing the root certificate of the CA that signed the Oracle HTTP Server certificates into the EPM System Configurator keystore. You must import CA root certificates into each server where EPM System products are installed. 5. Using EPM System Configurator, configure and deploy EPM System products. 6. Configure Oracle HTTP server. 7. Test your deployment.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 2-20

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

SSL Off-Loading

Apache Web Server (Server 1) HTTPS

HTTP

HTTP/AJP

Workspace

SSL Off-loader (OL server ) Apache Web Server 1/Reverse Proxy HTTP/AJP

y m

HSS

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

SSL Off-Loading

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

In this enterprise topology, the SSL connection can be terminated at the offloader (similar to terminating SSL at the Web server) or it can extend beyond the offloader (similar to full SSL). The offloader accepts encrypted requests from the browser and decrypts them. If SSL is terminated at the offloader, unencrypted data is passed from the offloader to Oracle HTTP Server, which is configured with the WebLogic Server plugin. An optional load balancer can be used to route traffic between the offloader and multiple Oracle HTTP Servers. Oracle HTTP Server routes requests to EPM System products deployed on WebLogic Server or IIS. Server-to-server communication is routed through the Web server without involving the offloader. Based on the security requirements, you can use SSL for communication between Oracle HTTP Server and the deployed EPM System products including databases and user directories.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-21

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

If you choose not to use SSL for communication between Oracle HTTP Server and the deployed EPM System products, you can minimize security risks by deploying the offloader and Oracle HTTP Server in the DMZ behind a firewall on a secure subnet to which users do not have direct access. WebLogic Servers, IIS, and other components could be behind another firewall to ensure higher level of security. The following process outlines the steps that you need to complete to configure an EPM System with an SSL offloader. For specific information about these steps, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System User and Role Security Guide. 1. Using the vendor’s documentation, configure the offloader. The offloader should be configured to receive SSL communication from clients through a secure port and decrypt it. • Add server aliases on the offloader. • If you are not using a load balancer, the offloader should forward the decrypted communication to Oracle HTTP Server. • If you are using a load balancer, the offloader should forward the decrypted communication to the load balancer, which routs communication to Oracle HTTP Servers. 2. Install the EPM System products.

y m

e d a

3. Depending on your security requirement, configure and deploy EPM System products using EPM System Configurator.

c A

• If you plan to terminate SSL communication at the offloader, configure and deploy EPM System products without selecting any SSL settings. You must configure SSL communication between the browser and the offloader (to the virtual offloader alias) separately by using the vendor’s documentation.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• If you are not terminating SSL at the offloader, refer to the documention for performing a full SSL deployment for detailed deployment procedures for all EPM System products that you can SSL-enable.

e l c

a r O 2-22

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Two-Way SSL

1 or 2-way SSL with propagation of user identity

2-way SSL

Browser, or Smart view client: Strong authentication (2factor) using client certificate

Web applications

Web server

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Two-Way SSL

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

In this scenario, two levels of verification are completed in two-way SSL authentication. The SSL client verifies the identity of the SSL server, and the SSL server verifies the identity of the SSL client. In the simplest implementation of two-way SSL, you use it only for external communication (between the browser and the Web server or offloader). You can, however, enable two-way SSL among underlying EPM System products. EPM System supports two implementations of two-way SSL for external communication. In the default two-way SSL implementation, EPM System uses a login screen to capture user credentials; typically a user name and password, that are used to authenticate the user.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-23

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Trust between components is established using the root certificate of the CA that the signed the component's certificate. You must ensure that the root CA certificate of a component is installed on each components with which it communicates. For example, to ensure two-way SSL communication between Oracle HTTP Server and Foundation Services deployed on WebLogic Server, the root certificate of the CA that signed the WebLogic Server certificate must be installed on Oracle HTTP Server and vice versa. If you are not using a trusted third party CA, to simplify the deployment process, Oracle recommends that you use the same CA to sign all server certificates. Self-signed certificates cannot be used to support two-way SSL. The following process outlines the steps that you need to complete to configure an EPM System for two-way SSL deployment. For specific information about these steps, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System User and Role Security Guide. 1. Install the EPM System products. 2. Depending on your security requirements, complete an SSL deployment with one of the following options: • Full SSL deployment

y m

• EPM System with an SSL offloader

e d a

• SSL terminated at an offloader

3. If you are not using certificates from a well known third party CA, import CA root certificates as needed. Generally, you should import CA root certificate of a component into the keystore used by each component with which it communicates.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

4. Complete custom Oracle HTTP Server configuration. 5. Complete custom WebLogic Server configuration. 6. Install certificates for clients (browsers).

7. Optional: implement automated authentication.

e l c

a r O 2-24

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Preparing Web Application Servers

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Preparing Web Application Servers

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The following EPM System products included in Planning require Web application servers: • Shared Services • Workspace

• Performance Management Architect • Calculation Manager

• Administration Services • Provider Services

e l c

• Financial Reporting

a r O

• Web Analysis • Planning

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-25

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Workspace and the application being integrated must be deployed to the same Web application server type. For example, if Workspace is deployed to Oracle WebLogic Server, Performance Management Architect must also be deployed to WebLogic Server.

General Considerations Note the following information about preparing Web application servers: • When deploying to an application server, EPM System products cannot be installed to directories with names that contain spaces; for example, c:\Program Files is not acceptable (unless you use a short path notation). • For automatic deployment, the Web server must reside on the same machine where Workspace is deployed. • If different OS accounts are used to install and run EPM System and your Web application server, the Web application server OS account must be granted the following: - Read access to the Hyperion home directory, and to all subdirectories and files therein.

y m

- Write access to HYPERION_HOME/logs.

e d a

In addition, when you use automatic deployment, the EPM System OS account must be granted write access to the application server files and directories.

c A

• Set all Web applications to have a session timeout that exceeds 10 minutes.

• You must use one type of Web server for all EPM System products that require one.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Supported Web Application Servers

The following Web application servers are supported: • Oracle WebLogic Server 11g (10.3.1)

• Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) 6.0+ • Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) 7.0+

Oracle Weblogic Server is delivered with the installation of EPM System products that require a Web application server.

e l c

a r O 2-26

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Preparing Web Servers

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Preparing Web Servers

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The following EPM System products included in Planning require Web servers: • Shared Services • Workspace

• Performance Management Architect • Calculation Manager

• Administration Services • Provider Services

e l c

• Financial Reporting • Web Analysis

a r O

• Planning

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-27

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

For automatic deployment, the Web server must reside on the same machine where Workspace will be deployed. You can use an internal Web server provided with your Java application server, or an external Web server. The following Web Servers are supported: • Oracle HTTP Server • Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) 6.0+ • Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) 7.0+

Oracle HTTP Server If you are using Oracle HTTP Server (OHS) as the Web server, increase the ThreadsPerChild parameter from the default value of 50 to 512 in the OHS Web Server configuration file (httpd.conf).

Microsoft IIS The following EPM System products require IIS to be installed with ASP .NET support enabled before you configure the product: • Performance Management Architect Service (Dimension Server)

e d a

• Financial Management • Strategic Finance • FDM

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Data Relationship Management

y m

c A

NOTE: If .NET is not detected, the installation program will install it. Microsoft IIS 6.0 can be configured to support either 32–bit application runtimes or 64–bit application runtimes on 64–bit operating systems. You cannot configure Microsoft IIS 6.0 to support both simultaneously. Therefore, in general, when installing and configuring EPM System products with Microsoft IIS 6.0, install 32–bit runtimes and 64–bit runtimes for EPM System Web tier components on different computers. You cannot deploy FDM (32–bit) and Strategic Finance (32–bit) on the same computer where Financial Management (64–bit) and Performance Management Architect (64–bit) are deployed. On 32–bit platforms, all EPM System products can co-exist.

e l c

a r O 2-28

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

NOTE: If IIS is chosen as the Web server during configuration, you must allow all unknown ISAPI extensions via the Internet Information Services Manager.

Enabling Existing .NET 2.0 Framework (Windows 2003) Performance Management Architect requires .NET 2.0 Framework on the machine where you install the Dimension server. If .NET 2.0 Framework is not installed on your machine, Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installer, Fusion Edition automatically installs it for you. If you are using Windows 2003 and .NET 2.0 is installed, you must register and enable .NET 2.0 with IIS. To enable .NET 2.0 on Windows 2003 machines: 1. Open IIS Manager. 2. In the left pane, select Web Service Extensions.

y m

3. If ASP.NET 2.0 is listed in the right pane, enable it by ensuring that the Status column is set to Allowed.

e d a

4. If ASP.NET 2.0 is not listed in the right pane and .NET 2.0 is installed, register .NET 2.0 with IIS: a. From the command prompt, go to this directory: C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v2.0.50727

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

b. Enter aspnet_regiis.exe -iru. c. Repeat steps 1-3.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-29

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Preparing Web Browsers

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Preparing Web Browsers

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox are both supported. You must ensure that the following browser preferences and options are enabled: • Javascript

• Cookies—The preferred setting is to allow cookies to be stored on your computer. The minimum requirement is to allow per-session level cookies. • Pop-up windows

For Internet Explorer, you must also do the following: • Enable ActiveX

e l c

• Add the Reporting and Analysis Web site to the trusted zone. For example, in Internet Explorer, select Tools, then Internet Options, then Security Tab, and then Trusted Sites, and then click Sites.

a r O 2-30

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

The following Web browser versions are supported: • Internet Explorer: 7.x and 8.x • Firefox: 3.5 NOTE: Firefox is not supported for FDM and ERP Integrator.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-31

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Preparing Server Disk Space and RAM

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Preparing Server Disk Space and RAM

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

This topic describes the disk space and RAM requirements for each EPM System product. These requirements are approximate and do not include additional possible requirements on the machine, such as extra space needed for a virtual environment. Disk space and RAM requirements are approximate and do not include additional possible requirements on the machine. The installation program checks for twice the required disk space, based on your product installation choices. Disk space estimates include documentation help files (if applicable) and EPM System products.

e l c

a r O 2-32

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

The following table describes the required disk space for EPM System server components: Product Family

Component

Disk Space (Minimum)

RAM (Minimum)

Foundation Services

Shared Services

800 MB

1.5 GB

Performance Management Architect

125 MB

1 GB for Dimension Server 512 MB each for Web tier and Data Synchronizer

Reporting and Analysis

Essbase

Planning Oracle’s Data Management

e l c

Calculation Manager

45 MB

256 MB

Reporting and Analysis Framework

2GB for services

1 GB

Financial Reporting

400 MB

1 GB

Web Analysis

2 GB

1 GB

Essbase Server

2GB

1GB

Administration Services

1GB

32 MB per user

Provider Services

680MB

340 MB

Integration Services

340MB

256 MB

Essbase API

40MB

Planning

20GB

FDM Database Server

Dependent on size of application

FDM folder structure

Dependent on size of application

FDM Application Server

400 MB

2 GB per 75 concurrent users

FDM Web Server

400 MB

2 GB

ERP Integrator

300 MB

2 GB

2GB for importing files

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

256 MB

2GB (application not included) 1 GB per 75 concurrent users, 2 GB minimum

For Shared Services, if you are using Lifecycle Management functionality, Oracle recommends that you significantly increase disk space due to storage of application data in the Shared Services file system.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-33

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Preparing Client Disk Space and RAM

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Preparing Client Disk Space and RAM

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Disk space and RAM requirements are approximate. The installation program checks for twice the required disk space, based on your product installation choices. The recommended minimum RAM requirement for all clients is 1 GB. The following table describes the required disk space for EPM System client components: Product Family

Component

Disk Space

EPM System Installer

EPM System Installer and all EPM System product assemblies

16 GB

Foundation Services

Common client components

400 MB

Smart View for Office

100 MB

Performance Management Architect (File Generator and Batch Client only)

20 MB

e l c

ra

O

2-34

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Product Family

Component

Disk Space

Reporting and Analysis

Financial Reporting Studio

400 MB

Web Analysis Studio

40 MB

Planning

Offline Planning

280 MB

Financial Data Management

FDM Workbench

200 MB

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-35

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Default Ports • During Hyperion product deployments, default port numbers for application servers are automatically populated. • Data repositories are accessible through default port numbers.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Default Ports

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

During the configuration process, default port numbers for most EPM System products are automatically populated in Oracle's Hyperion Shared Services Registry. During configuration, using EPM System Configurator, you can change the default numbers. Each port number on the machine must be unique. (The same product on different machines can have the same port number.) If an error message similar to “port already in use” or “bind error” is displayed, a port number conflict may exist. If the default port is already in use on the machine or if there is a conflict, EPM System Configurator will not continue. If the default port number is not changed, the software is configured with the default values.

e l c

a r O 2-36

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

NOTE: If you change a port number by using application server or web server tools (administration console or configuration file), you must also change the port number by using EPM System Configurator so that the port numbers are synchronized with the Shared Services Registry. After changing a port number by using the application server or web server tools, run EPM System Configurator and provide the new port number to update the Oracle's Hyperion Shared Services Registry. For a complete listing of EPM System ports, see “Default Ports” in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Start Here.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

2-37

Lesson 2

Preparing the Installation Environment

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • List the items required for the installation environment • Compare installation architecture options • Identify the supported user directories • Describe the supported SSL configurations • Identify the supported Web application servers • Identify the supported Web servers • Name the supported Web browsers

e d a

• Identify the server disk space and RAM requirements • Identify the client disk space and RAM requirements

c A

• List the default ports used by the EPM System software

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

a r O 2-38

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

3

Preparing the Software Requirements

3

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Identify supported server and client platforms • Identify supported databases • Access Oracle software and documentation • Prepare the required Oracle installation software

y m

• Recognize EPM System software dependencies • Identify required third-party software

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

e d a

Lesson 3

Preparing the Software Requirements

Selecting a Supported Platform •

Windows-only components: – Smart View Client – Performance Management Architect — —

Dimension Server File Generator

– Essbase Studio – Financial Data Quality Management – Financial Reporting — —

•

Studio Client Print Server Service

All other product components are supported on Unix

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Selecting a Supported Platform

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

EPM System Release 11.1.2 products support both Windows and UNIX operating systems. The following sections discuss what products are supported on Windows, and what products are supported on Unix.

Server Operating Systems

Windows-only Components The following table lists components of products that can be installed only on Windows: Product

e l c

Smart View

Component Supported on Windows Only Smart View Client

Performance Management Architect

• Dimension Server

Essbase Studio

All client components

a r O 3-2

• File Generator

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 3 Preparing the Software Requirements Product

Component Supported on Windows Only

Financial Data Quality Management

All components

Financial Reporting

• Financial Reporting Studio Client • Financial Reporting Print Server Service

NOTE: Both 32-bit and 64-bit versions of Windows are supported. However, the following products have only 32-bit binaries: Workspace Services, FDM, Financial Reporting Printer Service.

Unix Components All other EPM System products can be installed on a Unix platform. Both 32-bit and 64bit versions of Unix are supported.

Client Operating Systems

y m

EPM System client software are supported on the following platforms: Windows 32-bit • Windows Server 2008 with SP1+ • Windows Server 2003 with SP2/R2+

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Windows XP Professional with SP2+

e d a

c A

• Windows Vista with SP1+ (above "Home" series) • Windows 7

Windows 64-bit • Windows Server 2008 with SP1+

• Windows Server 2003 with SP2/R2+

• Windows XP Professional with SP2+

• Windows Vista with SP1+ (above "Home" series)

e l c

• Windows 7

a r O

UNIX • Red Hat EL 4 and 5 • Oracle Enterprise Linux 4 and 5

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

3-3

Lesson 3

Preparing the Software Requirements

Selecting a Supported Database Supported relational database repositories: • Oracle 11g • Microsoft SQL Server • IBM DB2

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Selecting a Supported Database

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Before installing and configuring most EPM System products, you must create a database using a supported RDBMS. For ease of deployment and simplicity, you can use one database repository for all products (with the exceptions noted below) or use a separate database repository for each product or product family.

Supported Databases

The following relational databases are supported: • Oracle Database 10g and 11g

e l c

• IBM DB2 9.5 to 9.7

a r O

• Microsoft SQL Server 2005 and 2008

3-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 3 Preparing the Software Requirements Oracle Database Oracle database versions 10.2.0.2.21+ through 11.1.0.7.20+ are supported. Considerations when using an Oracle database: • The database must be created using Unicode Transformation Format UTF-8 encoding (character set) for the best compatibility with non-ASCII character sets. Use of UTF-8 is required if you need multi-lingual support (multi character set support). • Install Oracle database client on the same machine as the Performance Management Architect Dimension server. • To share one Oracle instance among installations on separate computers, create an Oracle user for each installation (unless you are using load balancing). • Oracle user IDs should have the following roles: CONNECT, RESOURCE, CREATE, CREATE TRIGGER, DROP TRIGGER, MODIFY TRIGGER, CREATE PROCEDURE, ALTER SESSION, ALTER SYSTEM. • If your database resides on a remote computer, create a Net Service Name that enables the product to connect to the remote database. • Use the global database server name when specifying locations and paths. Do not use localhost as a server name.

y m

e d a

Microsoft SQL Server Microsoft SQL Server 2005 up to 2008 are supported for all EPM System products except for ERP Integrator. Considerations when using MS SQL Server:

c A

• When setting security properties for the database, select the SQL Server and Windows Authentication option.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Database users must be assigned privileges to add, modify, and delete these database objects: TABLES, INDEXES, VIEWS, PROCEDURES, ROLES/AUTHORITIES, SEQUENCES, TRIGGERS, SESSION. • The Reporting and Analysis repository database user cannot be an administrator or a user with the System Administrators role.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

3-5

Lesson 3

Preparing the Software Requirements

IBM DB2 IBM DB2 9.5 is supported by all EPM System products except FDM, Profitability and Costo Management, and Data Relationship Management. Considerations when using IBM DB2: • When installing IBM DB2, clear the OLAP Starter Kit option. • For Performance Management Architect, ensure that your DB2 database is installed on a different computer, and not the Dimension Server machine where the DB2 9 Runtime Client and DB2 .NET Data Provider must be installed. • For Reporting and Analysis, ensure that the IBM DB2 Client Application Enabler is installed on the computers on which you install services. For Core Services and Job Factory Service, if you use an IBM DB2 RDBMS and Reporting and Analysis Services is installed on a separate machine, create a client connection to the Reporting and Analysis database using the Client Application Enabler. • For Web Analysis, configure DB2 to use JDBC 2.0 drivers. Ensure that the IBM DB2 Client Application Enabler is installed. • For IBM DB2, the database must be created using Unicode Transformation Format UTF-8 encoding (character set) for the best compatibility with non-ASCII character sets. Use of UTF-8 is required if you need multi-lingual support (multi character set support).

y m

e d a

• Use the Client Configuration Assistant to set up a database alias that enables the Hyperion product to connect to the database. Be sure to select Register this Database for ODBC and As a System Data Source options.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

• Database users must be assigned privileges to add, modify, and delete these database objects: TABLES, INDEXES, VIEWS, PROCEDURES, ROLES/AUTHORITIES, SEQUENCES, TRIGGERS, SESSION.

e l c

a r O 3-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 3 Preparing the Software Requirements

Products Requiring a Relational Database A database is required for: • Shared Services • Reporting and Analysis Framework • Performance Management Architect • Calculation Manager • ERP Integrator • Administration Services • Essbase Studio • Planning (system) • Each deployed Planning application When you configure multiple products at one time using EPM System Configurator, one database is configured for all selected products. If you want to use a different database for each product, perform the Configure Database task separately for each product.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

3-7

Lesson 3

Preparing the Software Requirements

Classroom Database Definition

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Classroom Database Definition

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

In this class, the Oracle users, tablespaces, and data files have been precreated in both controller PC databases. A sample section of the script is displayed on the slide. Each student is assigned a student number at the beginning of the class. The student numbers are preceeded by the letters ST and are followed by a two-digit number. For example, ST01. The student number is attached to the tablespace and datafile name used in configuring products that require a relational database. The following table lists the tablespace and datafile names assigned to an EPM System product: EPM System Product

Tablespace

Datafile

Shared Services

ST##HSS

ST##HSS

ST##BI

ST##BI

e l c

a r O

Reporting and Analysis Framework

3-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 3 Preparing the Software Requirements EPM System Product

Tablespace

Datafile

Performance Management Architect

ST##EPMA

ST##EPMA

Calculation Manager

ST##CALC

ST##CALC

Administration Services and Essbase Studio

ST##ESS

ST##ESS

Financial Data Quality Management

USERS

ST##FDM

ERP Integrator

ST##ERPI

ST##ERPI

Planning (System)

ST##PLN

ST##PLN

Planning (Applications)

ST##PLN1, ST##PLN2, ST##PLN3, ST##PLN4, ST##PLN5, ST##PLN6, ST##PLN7

ST##PLN1, ST##PLN2, ST##PLN3, ST##PLN4, ST##PLN5, ST##PLN6, ST##PLN7

All database user passwords are set to hyperion.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

3-9

Lesson 3

Preparing the Software Requirements

Accessing Oracle Software and Documentation

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Accessing Oracle Software and Documentation

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

You download Oracle Software and Documentation from the following locations: • E-Delivery: http://edelivery.oracle.com

• Oracle Technology Network: http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/epm.html

e l c

a r O 3-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 3 Preparing the Software Requirements

Preparing the Required Software

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Preparing the Required Software

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

To prepare the required software for installation, perform the following tasks: • Download product installation assemblies:

- Foundation Services (all modules, including Shared Services, Workspace, Performance Management Architect, and Calculation Manager) - Planning

- Essbase, Administration Services, Provider Services, and Studio - Reporting and Analysis Framework - Financial Reporting

e l c

- Web Analysis

a r O

- Smart View

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

3-11

Lesson 3

Preparing the Software Requirements

• Review the Media Pack Readme section on the Enterprise Performance Management and BI page for your platform of Oracle E-Delivery to see which products are required or optional for use with your products. • Ensure that the products meet the release compatibility requirements of Oracle Hyperion software. The release compatibility information for each product will be discussed in later lessons. • Validate that all third-party product versions meet system requirements.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 3-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 3 Preparing the Software Requirements

Release Compatibility If you upgrade Planning to release 11.1.2, you must verify that all other product components are compatible.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Release Compatibility

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Upgrade is not supported in this release. You cannot mix releases with 11.1.2 software. NOTE: Oracle will include the ability to upgrade from previous EPM System releases in a future EPM System product release.

EPM System Certification Matrix

For system requirements and release compatibility, you can find the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Certification Matrix at http:// www.oracle.com/technology/products/bi/hyperion-supported-platforms.html.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

3-13

Lesson 3

Preparing the Software Requirements

EPM System Software Dependencies This topic lists the EPM System products required for EPM System components.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

EPM System Software Dependencies

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

This topic describes the required EPM System software for EPM System products. Component Shared Services

Required Software

Web Server configuration

Note: Workspace and Shared Service are now packaged together

Essbase

Shared Services (unless using Essbase in native security mode) Administration Services

Administration Services

e l c

a r O

Provider Services

3-14

Shared Services Essbase

Administration Services

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 3 Preparing the Software Requirements Component

Required Software

Essbase Studio

Shared Services Essbase Administration Services

Smart View

Provider Services

Reporting and Analysis

Shared Services Workspace

Planning (using Classic Administration)

Shared Services Workspace Essbase (Essbase Server and Administration Services components) Oracle's Hyperion® Business Rules or Calculation Manager

Planning (using Performance Management Architect)

Shared Services Workspace Essbase (Essbase Server and Administration Services components) Performance Management Architect

e d a

Calculation Manager Financial Management

Shared Services Workspace

y m

c A

Performance Management Architect (optional, if you are using Classic Application Administration)

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Calculation Manager (optional)

FDM

Shared Services—For external authentication only

ERP Integrator

Shared Services Workspace

Oracle Data Integrator (ODI)

NOTE: Provider Services integrates with Essbase, Administration Services, and Shared Services but is not required.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

3-15

Lesson 3

Preparing the Software Requirements

Some EPM System clients require the runtime clients of other EPM System or third-party products. EPM System runtime client and server versions must match. The following table describes the supported runtime clients for EPM System client components. Runtime Client

Required For

Essbase—The Essbase runtime client is installed automatically.

Financial Reporting

Microsoft SQL Server 2000 SP3a Analysis Services Microsoft SQL Server 2005 SP1 Analysis Services Financial Management—The version of the Financial Management ADM driver and the version of Financial Management that is used for Financial Reporting and Web Analysis must match.

Interactive Reporting Production Reporting Web Analysis Financial Reporting Web Analysis

Planning—The Planning ADM driver must be installed on all Financial Reporting server machines; it is a component in the EPM System Installer. Essbase—The Essbase runtime client is installed automatically.

Planning

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 3-16

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 3 Preparing the Software Requirements

Preparing Third-Party Software Install the following third-party software required by EPM System products: • Operating System and the required updates • Internet Information Services Manager •

PDF Distiller (Adobe or AFPL)

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Preparing Third-Party Software

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The following third-party software are required: Supported Software

Notes

Adobe Acrobat Reader 6.0 or later

Required for viewing PDF files

One of the following:

Microsoft Excel is required to use Smart View and Offline Planning

• Microsoft Office 2007 • Microsoft Office 2003

Microsoft SQL Server (2005 SP1 or 2000 SP3a) Analysis Services client

e l c

a r O

Required for Financial Reporting and Web Analysis You must install the SSAS Connectivity Client on any Financial Reporting Client or Financial Reporting server or Web Analysis Web Application machine. The SSAS client and server versions must match.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

3-17

Lesson 3

Preparing the Software Requirements

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Identify supported server and client platforms • Identify supported databases • Access Oracle software and documentation • Prepare the required Oracle installation software • Recognize EPM System software dependencies • Identify required third-party software

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 3-18

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

4

Installing Product Components

4

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Describe EPM System Installer • Enumerate the steps to install EPM System products • Identify installation options • Create and execute silent installation files • Install Shared Services, Workspace, Performance Management Architect, and Calculation Manager • Install Essbase components

e d a

• Install Planning and Off-line Planning • Install Reporting and Analysis Framework

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Install the Smart View

• Install optional product components

a r O

e l c

y m

c A

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

EPM System Installer Overview You use EPM System Installer to install all EPM System components.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

EPM System Installer Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

EPM System Installer enables you to install, configure, and deploy multiple products on a machine at one time. EPM System Installer installs components in the correct order, so you can select as many products as you want to install on a machine at one time. You use EPM System Installer to install all but the following EPM System products: • Smart View client

• Spreadsheet Add-in

• Data Integration Management

• Data Integration Management Adapters

e l c

• Data Relationship Management

a r O 4-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Installation Prerequisites Note the following installation prerequisites: • If you plan to deploy EPM System products in an SSL-enabled environment, review the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide before you install and configure. The SSL implementation you choose affects the available options during configuration. • If you plan to install Financial Close Management, you must install Oracle ServiceOriented Architecture (SOA) Suite first. • Typically, EPM System Installer installs WebLogic Server. If you want to use an existing WebLogic Server installation instead of the WebLogic Server installed by EPM System Installer, note the Middleware home location for the WebLogic Server installation. During installation, you must install EPM System products to this same Middleware home. If EPM System Installer detects an existing WebLogic Server installation in the installation location, it does not install WebLogic Server. • If you plan to install Strategic Finance Integration with Enterprise, you must install the Enterprise client first.

y m

Oracle HTTP Server Prerequisites

e d a

If you do not have an HTTP server installed, EPM System Installer will install Oracle HTTP Server (OHS) for you when you install Foundation Services. Before you begin installation, make sure that you meet the installation prerequisites for OHS. Review the OHS installation documentation and release notes for details.

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-3

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Installing EPM System Products You perform the following tasks in EPM System Installer: 1. Verify system prerequisites are met 2. Specify Middleware home directory 3. Select installation type 4. 5. 6. 7.

Select products to be installed Confirm your selections Install products Review summary report

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Installing EPM System Products

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You can install EPM System products using the graphical user interface, using the console mode interface, or using a silent mode installation response file. On Windows machines, run EPM System Installer as an administrator. Install as the same user for all EPM System products. On UNIX machines, do not use the root user to install. Install and configure as the same user for all EPM System products. To install EPM System Products: 1. Choose a method:

e l c

• (Windows) Double-click installTool.cmd in the root directory to which you extracted the EPM System Installer files.

a r O

• (Windows) From a Windows console, change to the root directory to which you extracted the EPM System Installer files and enter installTool.cmd -console.

4-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

• Create a silent installation response file. • (UNIX) Change to the root directory to which you extracted the EPM System Installer files and enter ./installTool.sh. • (UNIX) Change to the root directory to which you extracted the EPM System Installer files and enter ./installTool.sh -console. EPM System Installer is launched. TIP: The first page of EPM System Installer might open hidden behind other windows if you navigate away from the EPM System Installer window or if you try to reposition the initial window. Press Alt+Tab to switch to the first page of the wizard. 2. Select a language for the installer. 3. Review and complete each page of EPM System Installer, clicking Next to move to the next page. In console mode, type the number beside the selection that you want.

y m

4. When installation is complete, click Configure to configure the products using EPM System Configurator, or click Finish to close EPM System Installer.

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-5

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Reviewing System Prerequisites

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Reviewing System Prerequisites

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Review the prerequisites carefully before you continue the installation. EPM System Installer checks for the following:

• Whether your system has a supported operating system.

• Whether your system meets minimum memory requirements to run the installation. • Whether the user installing has administrator privileges.

• Whether the computer host name resolves to an IP address. If the machine host name resolves to an IP address, EPM System Installer provides a warning. Oracle recommends that you resolve this issue and provide a host name instead of an IP address before proceeding.

e l c

• Whether 1 GB of temporary space is available.

a r O 4-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

A check mark indicates that your system meets EPM System Installer prerequisites. If any of the prerequisite items do not display a check mark, and you select to continue, the installation might not succeed. TIP: If you are using a hosts file to resolve your host name, the host name resolves to the first entry in your hosts file. To prevent potential communication problems in a distributed environment, make sure that the first entry in your hosts file is the machine's fully qualified domain name so that the fully qualified name is stored in the Shared Services Registry.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-7

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Specifying the Middleware Home Directory

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Specifying the Middleware Home Directory

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

A Middleware home consists of the Oracle WebLogic Server home, and, optionally, one or more Oracle homes, including EPM Oracle home. A Middleware home can reside on a local file system or on a remote shared disk that is accessible through NFS. The Middleware home location is defined during the first product installation on the computer. Subsequent installations on the computer use the previously defined location. The default installation directory is Oracle/Middleware. The destination you specify becomes the Middleware home. By default EPM System Installer creates a default EPM Oracle home under the Middleware home.

e l c

a r O 4-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Middleware Home Prerequisites Note the following information about Middleware Home: • Ensure that this destination has enough disk space to install all the products that you want to install on this machine. See Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Start Here for disk space requirements. • You select a Middleware home for each machine in your environment. • If you are reinstalling EPM System products on this machine, or adding products to your installation, the existing location for the Middleware home is listed as the default installation destination, and you cannot change it. The destination path cannot contain spaces; for example, c:\Program Files is not acceptable.

EPM Oracle Home An Oracle home contains installed files that are necessary to host a specific product, and resides within the directory structure of the Middleware home. The EPM Oracle home contains files for EPM System products.

y m

Components of EPM System products are installed in the EPM Oracle home directory under the Middleware home. The default EPM Oracle home location is MIDDLEWARE_HOME\EPMSystem11R1. In addition, common internal components used by the products are installed in EPM Oracle home. Choose the location carefully to ensure that the location has enough disk space for all products that you are installing on the machine. You cannot change the location.

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

In a distributed environment, the EPM Oracle home directory structure must be the same on each machine.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-9

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Installation Options

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Installation Options

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The following sections discuss installation options when installing EPM System products.

Selecting an Installation Type

When you install EPM System products, you select which type of installation to perform: • New installation: Choose this option if you are installing an EPM System product for the first time on this computer, or if you want to install additional components that you did not initially install. • Re-install this release: Choose this option if you already installed this version of this EPM System product and you want to reinstall it; for example if you need to repair an existing installation.

e l c

a r O 4-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

NOTE: You cannot combine installation types in one session. For example, you cannot perform a new installation of one product at the same time that you perform a reinstallation of another product. For each type of installation, you select whether to install EPM System products by tier or by individual component: • Select “Choose components by tier” to install all the product components for the selected products by tier (Client, Web application, and Services). You still have the option to specify installation location and the products to install. • Select “Choose components individually” if you want more control over which services and components are installed for each product component. Oracle recommends that you install EPM System products by tier.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-11

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Selecting the Products to Install

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Selecting the Products to Install

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Generally, you can install any combination of components on any computer. Note the following about product selection: • Products are available for installation only if the assemblies are downloaded to the correct location and the selected component is supported on the platform on which you are installing. If a product is unavailable on the Product Selection page, ensure that the assemblies are in the correct location. • Select a product component to see information and status about it in the lower portion of the screen. If Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) is required for your installation, and it is not installed, a warning is noted in the lower portion of the screen, and you cannot proceed until you install IIS. If you are installing on an unsupported platform, a warning is displayed.

e l c

• The Shared Services and Workspace Web applications are installed when you install the Foundation Services Web application.

a r O 4-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

• If you selected “New Installation,” and you have already installed this release of a product, the product is unavailable in the Product Selection page. • In some cases, a component is selected, but it is unavailable (you cannot clear it), because it is required for another selected component. You can install products by tier or individually. Installing Products by Tier To install by tier, select the deployment tier to install: Client, Web application, or Services. EPM System Installer automatically selects all product components that are available for installation on the selected tier. Components are available for installation if you downloaded the installation assemblies and extracted them to the proper /assemblies directory. EPM System Installer automatically selects required components for the selected product. You can install all the products on a particular machine at one time. EPM System Installer installs them in the correct order. Installing Products Individually To install products individually, browse the product list and select individual products or components. You can expand and collapse the entries to select or clear specific options for each product and component.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-13

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Confirming Your Selections

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Confirming Your Selections

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Before installing the product components that you selected, you can review the summary of products to be installed. If necessary, you can go back and make corrections. From this Panel, you click Next to begin the installation, or Save to save your selections to a response file for use in a silent installation. EPM System Installer warns you if there is insufficient disk space for the products that you selected. During installation, EPM System Installer displays the progress indicator after it prepares the list of assemblies to install. This might take several minutes, depending on how many products you selected. EPM System Installer displays progress incrementally as each assembly's installation is complete.

e l c

a r O 4-14

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Reviewing the Summary Report

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Reviewing the Summary Report

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

EPM System Installer indicates the success or failure of the installation. If any part of the installation failed, EPM System Installer notes which assembly failed to install. Check the log files for more information about the errors. You can find the log files in EPM_ORACLE_HOME/diagnostics/logs/install. Each assembly has a log file named productinstall.log; for example, hss-install.log, and a log file for installation, installToolinstall.log.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-15

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Performing Silent Installations You run the installTool.cmd file to perform silent installations.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Performing Silent Installations

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Silent installations automate the installation process so that you can install EPM System products on multiple computers without manually specifying installation settings on each machine. To enable silent installation, record your installation settings in a response file. You can then run a silent installation from the command line, using the installation options that were saved in the response file.

Recording Response Files

You can record response files in the following ways:

e l c

• Record the installation settings while performing an installation. • Record the installation settings without performing an installation.

a r O 4-16

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

To record installation settings while performing an installation: 1. Navigate to the directory that contains EPM System Installer. 2. From a command line, run a command: • installTool.cmd -record file name for Windows • installTool.sh -record file name for UNIX Where file name includes an absolute path or file name for the response file. EPM System Installer is launched. 3. Proceed through EPM System Installer, specifying the options that you want to record. On the Installation Confirmation Panel, click Next to perform the installation. The products are installed according to the installation settings that you specified, and the installation settings are recorded in the response file that you specified. To record installation settings without performing an installation: 1. Launch EPM System Installer.

y m

2. Proceed through EPM System Installer, specifying the options that you want to record. On the Installation Confirmation Panel, click Save to record the settings in a response file. 3. Browse to a location to save the response file. 4. Specify a file name for the response file, and click Save.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The response file is saved.

Modifying Response Files

After creating a response file, you can modify it to customize the installation options for certain machines. For example, you might create a master silent file for all products, and then for each machine, change the location of the Middleware home and keep only the product components that you want to install on this machine. To modify a response file:

1. Navigate to the location where you saved the response file.

e l c

2. Open the response file in a text editor. The response file is in XML format.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-17

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

3. Edit the file using the following options: • —Location of the Middleware home. • —Product components to install to specific tiers. Make changes in , , , and . • —The name of the product. Enclose product names in quotation marks, because they are XML attributes. • —The component of the product. Enclose component names in quotation marks, because they are XML attributes. • —The installation tier for the component installation (Client, Service, WebApplication). • — The services to install. 4. Save the file in XML format.

Executing Response Files After creating and modifying a response file, you execute it to perform a silent installation.

y m

e d a

To execute a response file:

c A

1. Copy the response file to the machine on which you want to run the installation. You can also copy the file to a network drive that is accessible from the machines on which you want to install.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

2. From the command line, enter a command:

• installTool.cmd -silent file name for Windows • installTool.sh -silent file name for UNIX

Where file name includes an absolute path or file name for the response file. The installation runs in the background.

e l c

a r O 4-18

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Installing Foundation Services Foundation Services installations include Shared Services and EPM Workspace.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Installing Foundation Services

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Foundation Services consists of four components: • Shared Services • Workspace

• Performance Management Architect • Calculation Manager

Workspace is installed with Shared Services when you select Foundation Services in EPM System Installer.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-19

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Shared Services Shared Services provides a central framework for creating, provisioning, and maintaining users; and managing user security across all Hyperion modules, including external authentication. It also facilitates sharing metadata and infrastructure services. Shared Services is designed to provide easy integration and interoperability with existing IT assets. Shared Services provides user provisioning and external authentication. User Provisioning and External Authentication Refer to Lesson 5, Configuring Shared Services, for more information on user provisioning and external authentication. Selecting Foundation Services Components The following table lists the Foundation Services components that you can select to install: Foundation Services Component

Description

Foundation Services Web Application

Installs the Shared Services and Workspace Web applications.

Oracle HTTP Server

Installs Oracle HTTP Server if it is not already installed.

WebLogic Application Server

Installs WebLogic Application Server if it is not already installed.

y m

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

NOTE: If you want to use an existing WebLogic Server installation instead of the WebLogic Server installed by EPM System Installer, note the Middleware home location for the WebLogic Server installation. During installation, you must install EPM System products to this same Middleware home. If EPM System Installer detects an existing WebLogic Server installation in the installation location, it does not install WebLogic Server.

Workspace

Workspace is a DHTML-based, zero-footprint client. It provides the user interface for viewing and interacting with content created with authoring studios and financial applications, including:

e l c

a r O

• Consolidation application tasks • Planning application tasks

4-20

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

• Financial reporting for scheduled or on-demand, highly formatted financial and operational reporting from most data sources, including Financial Management and Planning • Interactive reporting for ad hoc relational queries, self-service reporting, and dashboards against ODBC data sources • Production reporting for high volume enterprise-wide reporting • Web analysis for interactive ad hoc analysis, presentation, and reporting of multidimensional data • Enterprise metrics for management metrics and analysis presented in easy-to-use, personalized, interactive dynamic dashboards

Performance Management Architect Performance Management Architect is the component of Foundation Services that helps streamline the creation and deployment of financial applications from a central location. The visual environment provided by Performance Management Architect allows for a simple and intuitive user experience in modeling the financial business process, including data, dimensions, and application logic.

y m

Performance Management Architect helps users configure these dimensions from an extensible library, link different applications, reuse or move artifacts from one application to another, and graphically manage data flows between applications. In this way, Performance Management Architect provides the industry’s first business process modeling tool for building and maintaining Planning and Financial Management applications.

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Selecting Performance Management Architect Components The following table lists the Performance Management Architect components that you can select to install: Performance Management Architect Component Batch Client File Generator Web Application

e l c

Description

Installs a command-line tool to access Performance Management Architect. Installs the ADS file generator tool.

Installs all components to access Performance Management Architect through the Internet.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-21

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Performance Management Architect Component

Description

Data Synchronizer Service

Installs the Performance Management Architect data synchronization engine.

Dimension Server Service

Installs the Performance Management Architect dimension server.

Installing Microsoft IIS and .Net Framework To use Performance Management Architect, Microsoft IIS must be installed on the Dimension server as well as the Financial Management application server. The application server does not need to have the ASP components enabled. • For Windows 2000 Server, IIS 5.0 is provided. • For Windows 2003, IIS 6.0 is provided. For IIS 6.0, you must enable the following components: - Active Server Pages (ASP) - ASP .NET 2.0 (automatically installed if not present)

y m

Performance Management Architect requires .NET 2.0 Framework on the machine where you install the Dimension server. If .NET 2.0 Framework is not installed on your machine, EPM System Installer automatically installs it.

e d a

Calculation Manager

c A

Calculation Manager is a feature of Performance Management Architect that is installed with Foundation Services. It provides the graphical interface for building and calculating business rules for Planning and Financial Management applications. To use Calculation Manager, you must install both Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager.

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

a r O 4-22

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Installing Essbase Essbase installations include the following:

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Installing Essbase

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Essbase is the business analysis server technology that provides an environment for rapidly developing custom analytic and enterprise performance management applications. During installation, EPM System Installer installs components and services for the selected Essbase products and creates Start menu items under All Users. Planning requires the installation of Essbase and Administration Services. Essbase Provider Services is required to support Smart View. Planning does not require the installation of Essbase Integration Services.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-23

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Essbase Server and Client The following table lists the Essbase components that you can install: Essbase Component

Description

Essbase Services Server

Installs the Essbase Server, which acts as a shared resource, handling all data storage, caching, calculations, and data security

Essbase Client

Installs the Essbase thin-client

Administration Services Administration Services is the cross-platform administration tool for Essbase. It consists of Administration Server (a Java middle-tier server), and Essbase Administration Services Console (a thin-client console).

Provider Services Provider Services is a middle-tier data source provider to the following products: • Essbase

y m

• Planning • Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition • Smart View, Java API (Essbase data only) • XMLA clients (Essbase data only)

e d a

c A

The software supports highly concurrent analytical scenarios and provides scalability and reliability in a distributed Web-enabled enterprise environment.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Essbase Studio

Essbase Studio consolidates cube-construction activities into one interface, enabling consistent performance for data load and outline build. EPM System Installer installs the software client

e l c

a r O 4-24

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Installing Planning Planning installations include the following components:

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Installing Planning

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

EPM System Installer enables you to install Planning Off-Line Client and Planning Web Application. Planning Off-Line Client is accessible through Smart View. Planning Web Application is launched through Workspace.

Planning

Planning provides complete functionality for Web users through Workspace. You use the Web interface to roll out applications to large, distributed organizations without installing software on client computers. All software resides on the server Planning administrators can create two types of applications: classic Planning applications, which use Business Rules, and Performance Management Architect Planning applications, which use Calculation Manager business rules. Installation of Performance Management Architect is optional.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-25

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Off-line Planning With Offline Planning and Smart View, Planners can disconnect from the Planning server and work with data forms offline. Planners retrieve data forms from Planning, load them into Smart View, and take them offline. They can also enter and save data directly to the Planning server. You can work with Planning data forms from remote locations when you are not connected to a Planning server. You can disconnect from the Planning server and work offline and still be able to use comparable online functionality. Working offline, you can enter and save data to the Planning server. Working offline allows you to take a Planning data form in Excel and establish an impromptu local connection to a data source without being connected to the Planning server. Thus, you can continue to work on plan data and perform what-if scenarios when you do not have access to the Planning server. When you take a data form offline, the Planning server flags the data form status as offline. Data forms associated with a connection are saved locally on your hard drive. By synchronizing the locally saved data with the server, you ensure that the data form uses the most recent information.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 4-26

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Installing Reporting and Analysis Framework Reporting and Analysis Framework installations include the following:

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Installing Reporting and Analysis Framework

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Reporting and Analysis Framework consists of five components: • Framework Services

• Interactive Reporting

• SQR Production Reporting • Financial Reporting • Web Analysis

In this class, you install Framework Services, Financial Reporting, and Web Analysis.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-27

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Framework Services Framework Services contains core and common libraries required by Planning components. It is installed in the services tier of the environment. If you are installing EPM System products in a distributed environment, you must install one instance of Framework Services on each host machine.

Financial Reporting Financial Reporting is a module of Oracle BI EE Plus that enables book-quality, financial management and reporting. This financial reporting solution can use Financial Management, Planning, Essbase, as well as SAP BW as data sources. Financial Reporting provides conditional suppression and automatic calculations that can be used to focus and filter reports. A graphical, object-based interface enables the rapid creation of reports that combine grids of data and text, charts, graphs, and images. A library of reusable report components simplifies and streamlines the process of building and maintaining complex reports. Users have complete control over layouts, formatting, fonts, and colors, as well as a flexible range of output options that enable wide distribution through print, HTML Web pages, PDF, and online viewing. A scalable, cross-platform report server facilitates easy deployment to large user communities.

y m

Financial Reporting shares common administration, user management, installation, and configuration support with other Hyperion BI tools. This common infrastructure provides one point of access for end users to all content while reducing the maintenance required for IT professionals.

e d a

c A

The following table describes the Financial Reporting components that you can install: Components Studio Client Web Application

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Reports Server Service

e l c

Description

Installs a Windows authoring client for creating and editing reports. Installs all components to access Financial Reporting through the Internet. Installs the Financial Reporting Reports Server, which generates and formats dynamic report or book results, including specified calculations.

a r O 4-28

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Components

Description

Print Server Service

Installs the Financial Reporting Print Server, which enables Financial Reporting content to be compiled as PDF output.

Scheduler Server Service

Installs the Financial Reporting Scheduler Server, which responds to Financial Reporting scheduled batch requests and prompts the other Financial Reporting servers to fulfill the request at the specified time.

Web Analysis Web Analysis is a module of Oracle BI EE Plus that delivers powerful, intuitive, Webbased interactive analytics to all corners of the enterprise. A highly graphical and easyto-use interactive interface, it enables users to view their data in a way that makes sense to them. Web Analysis provides a broad range of flexible, easy-to-use display types including grids, charts, pin boards, traffic lighting, and personalization. Users have complete control over layouts, formatting, fonts, and colors, as well as a flexible array of output options that enable wide distribution through print, HTML Web pages, PDF, and online viewing.

y m

e d a

Web Analysis shares common administration, user management, and installation and configuration support with other Hyperion BI modules of Oracle BI EE Plus. This common infrastructure provides one point of access for end users to all content while reducing the maintenance required for IT professionals.

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-29

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Reporting and Analysis Architecture Client

Smart View

Authoring studios

EPM Workspace

Application Web Server

HTTP connector Financial Reporting web application Web Tier Services Tier

Workspace and Interactive Reporting web application

Production Reporting service

Web Analysis web application Java application server

Financial Reporting servers

Interactive Reporting services

Core Services Database

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Reporting and Analysis Architecture

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The Reporting and Analysis environment is organized into three layers (check for new architecture slide): Client Layer The client layer refers to local interfaces used to author, model, analyze, present, report, and distribute diverse content, and third-party clients, such as Microsoft Office: • Workspace—Workspace is a Web-based, DHTML, zero-footprint client that provides the user interface for viewing and interacting with content created by the authoring studios, and enables users to create queries against relational and multidimensional data sources.

e l c

• Windows authoring studios—Each reporting tool has a Windows authoring client (studio) for creating and editing reports.

a r O 4-30

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

• Smart View—Smart View is a Hyperion-specific Microsoft add-in and toolbar from which users can query Hyperion data sources, including Essbase, Financial Management, and Planning. In this environment, users can interact with Financial Management and Planning forms for data input, and can browse the Reporting and Analysis repository and embed documents in the office environment. Documents are updated by user request. Application Layer The application layer is a middle tier that retrieves requested information and manages security, communication, and integration. It includes an application layer Web tier and an application layer services tier. • The application layer Web tier relies upon a J2EE application server and Web server to send and receive content from Web clients. An HTTP connector is required to link the Web server and the application server. The Web tier hosts the Workspace, Interactive Reporting, Financial Reporting, and Web Analysis Web applications. • The application layer services tier contains services and servers that control functionality of various Web applications and clients: - Core services are mandatory for authorization, session management, and document publication.

y m

e d a

- Interactive Reporting services are core services that support Interactive Reporting functionality by communicating with data sources, starting RSC services, and distributing Interactive Reporting client content.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

- Financial Reporting servers support Financial Reporting functionality by processing batch requests, generating output, and distributing Financial Reporting client content. - SQR Production Reporting service responds to scheduled and on-demand requests by Job Service to run jobs, process data, and generate reports. SQR Production Reporting service is optimized for high volume reporting through native drivers, array processing for large data sets, and cursor management. It processes time-saving data manipulation operations in one pass of the data source and produces large quantities of reports in online and printed formats. SQR Production Reporting service is a replicable service.

e l c

Database Layer Architecturally, databases fall into two fundamental groups: repositories that store Hyperion system data and data sources that are the subject of analysis, presentation, and reporting.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-31

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Installing Smart View

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Installing Smart View

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Most EPM System clients are installed with EPM System Installer; however, Smart View has its own installer. To install Smart View: 1. Choose a method:

• Download the Smart View ZIP file from E-Delivery, unzip the file to a temporary location, and launch Smartview.exe. • If you installed and configured Workspace, you can launch the Smart View installer from within Workspace. Select Tools, then Install, and then Smart View.

e l c

2. Select a language for the Wizard.

ra

The Smart View Install Wizard is displayed.

O

3. Review the Welcome Panel, and click Next.

4-32

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

4. Accept the default destination folder, or click Change to specify a destination folder, and then click Next. 5. Click Install to begin the installation. The Smart View client is installed. 6. Click Finish to close the Wizard. To install Smart View silently: 1. Download the Smart View ZIP file from E-Delivery and unzip the file to a temporary location. 2. Navigate to the location where you unzipped the Smart View executable, and type the following: Smartview.exe /s /v” /qn URL=http://myWebServer:19000/workspace/SmartViewProviders The Smart View client is installed.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-33

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Optional Components Planning product options include:

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Optional Components

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Planning licenses for the following components may be purchased separately: • Capital Expenditures Planning—is a specialized planning module that automates the planning of capital assets and capital asset related expenses, such as depreciation, maintenance and insurance. Oracle Hyperion Capital Asset Planning includes prebuilt functionality and best practices that easily plan for all your capital expenses. It is also directly linked to Oracle Hyperion Planning Plus, so you can immediately assess the impact of your capital expenses on your overall expenses and financial statements. • Public Sector Planning and Budgeting—is a Web-based integrated budgeting and planning module in the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System suite. It helps public sector and higher education organizations manage existing and projected budgets that are based on reliable information from HRMS and General Ledger systems.

e l c

a r O 4-34

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

• Workforce Planning—is a special-purpose planning module that makes headcount, salary, and compensation planning fast and efficient across the enterprise. Designed with pre-built functionality and best practices that are ready to use right out of the box, it simplifies the planning of workforce and workforce related expenses, such as bonuses, fringe benefits, overtime and merit increases. It also automatically and seamlessly links your workforce expense plans into Oracle Hyperion Planning Plus, to deliver accurate and real-time awareness of the business impact of your workforce decisions on your overall expense plans. These components are installed with Planning. Depending on your licensing options, you can enable these modules during product configuration.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

4-35

Lesson 4

Installing Product Components

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Describe EPM System Installer • Enumerate the steps to install EPM System products • Identify installation options • Create and execute silent installation files • Install Shared Services, Workspace, Performance Management Architect, and Calculation Manager

y m

• Install Essbase components

e d a

• Install Planning and Off-line Planning • Install Reporting and Analysis Framework • Install the Smart View • Install optional product components

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 4-36

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

5

Configuring Shared Services

5

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Describe EPM System Configurator • Describe the Configuration Sequence • Configure Shared Services • Configure the Shared Services and Registry Database Connection

y m

• Configure EPM System Common Settings • Deploy EPM System products to a Weblogic domain

e d a

• Register with Oracle Configuration Manager • Set the Shared Services Admin User Password • Configure Foundation Services Web Server

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Configure external user directories

• Configure MSAD or LDAP User Directories • Provision users and groups • Create Application Groups

a r O

e l c

c A

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

EPM System Configurator Overview You use EPM System Configurator to configure EPM System product components.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

EPM System Configurator Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

EPM System Configurator enables you to configure and deploy multiple products on a single machine or on a multi-server environment. EPM System Configurator is installed on each machine an EPM System product is installed. You use EPM System Configurator to configure all but the following EPM System products: • Smart View client

• Spreadsheet Add-in

• Data Integration Management

e l c

• Data Integration Management Adapters • Data Relationship Management

a r O

When you configure products, EPM System Configurator displays the Common Settings page once on each machine that you configure.

5-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

To launch EPM System Configurator, perform any of the following: Perform any of the following actions: • On the last page of EPM System Installer, click or Configure. • From the Windows Start menu, select Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Foundation Services, and then EPM System Configurator. • Double-click configtool.bat from the EPM_ORACLE_HOME/common/config/version_number directory. • From the Windows command prompt, navigate to EPM_ORACLE_HOME/common/config/version_number, and then enter startconfigtool.bat console. • From the UNIX terminal, navigate to EPM_ORACLE_HOME/common/config/version_number and then enter ./configtool.sh console.

Configuration Prerequisites

y m

Note the following configuration prerequisites:

• If you plan to deploy EPM System products in an SSL-enabled environment, review the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide before you configure. The SSL implementation you select affects the options you select during configuration.

e d a

c A

• If you plan to integrate Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition or Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher with Workspace, you must first perform prerequisite tasks specified in the Oracle Business Intelligence New Features Guide Release 10.1.3.4.x. After completing the prerequisite tasks, use EPM System Configurator to configure the Web server to proxy to the Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition server.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Oracle recommends documenting your configuration steps for disaster recovery.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-3

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Configuration Tasks Common Tasks

Other Tasks

•

Common Settings

•

Configure Database for Foundation Services Configure Logical Address for Web Applications Configure Oracle Configuration Manager Setting the Shared Services admin user password

• • •

• • • •

Configure Product Database Configure Web Server Deploy to Application Server Product-specific tasks

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuration Tasks

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

EPM System Configurator provides tasks for configuration and reconfiguration of EPM System products. Note the following when selecting configuration tasks: • Not all tasks are required for all products.

• In a new installation, all required tasks are selected by default. You cannot deselect mandatory tasks, which are selected by default. If the task is unavailable (dimmed) and selected (checked), the task is performed and you cannot deselect it. • EPM System Configurator automatically performs some common tasks the first time you configure any component of a product, such as Shared Services registration. EPM System Configurator uses the Shared Services Registry to find the location of Shared Services.

e l c

a r O 5-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

• You can clear tasks that you want to perform later. • Select Check All or Uncheck All to quickly select or deselect all tasks. • Workspace and Shared Services are deployed when you select the Deploy to Application Server task for Foundation Services. Common Tasks When you configure EPM System Products for the first time, you run the following common tasks: • Common Settings—Select to create windows services for configured components, use SSL for Web application server communications (requires manual configuration), and set up mail servers. EPM System Configurator displays the Common Settings page once on each machine that you configure. • Configure Database for Foundation Services—Enter database connection information for Foundation Services. The Foundation Services database holds the Shared Services Registry data. • Configure Logical Address for Web applications—An optional task. Accept or change the default logical address for a Web application without redeploying.

y m

• Configure Oracle Configuration Manager—Specify the contact information to use for notifications from My Oracle Support and Oracle Configuration Manager.

e d a

• Set Shared Services admin user password—A required task. EPM System Configurator creates a preprovisioned user called admin that enables you to log on to Shared Services.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

If you configure on another machine and change any of these options, your new selections apply for all products and machines that you have not configured. If you reconfigure on a machine, the new settings apply to any products that you reconfigure and to future configurations. Other Tasks When you configure EPM System products, the following tasks may be required: • Configure Product Database—Specify the database settings to use for the products that you selected on the Task Selection page. You can use one database for all products by configuring products all at once or by selecting the same database during configuration. If you prefer to use a different database for each product, perform the Configure Database task separately for each product.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-5

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

• Configure Web Server—Select to deploy to an existing or new Weblogic domain, and enter Web server connection details. • Deploy to Application Server—Accept or change the application server deployment information for the products that you selected on the Task Selection page. • Product-specific tasks—Configure product-specific settings. This option is discussed in succeeding topics and lessons.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 5-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Configuration Sequence

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuration Sequence

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

By default, EPM System Configurator selects all products to configure. NOTE: Foundation Services must be installed and configured first for other products to configure successfully. Note the following information about configuration sequence:

• By default, EPM System Configurator uses the same database for all products you configure at one time. To use a different database for each product, perform the Configure Database task separately for each product.

e l c

• Automatic Web server configuration with EPM System Configurator is supported only for the Oracle HTTP Server installed by EPM System Installer or IIS. The Web server can be on the same machine or on a different machine than Foundation Services. If you are using a different Web server, you must manually configure the Web server.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-7

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

• If you already configured the Web server and you deploy any additional products, you must run EPM System Configurator again and select the Foundation Services Configure Web Server task. You configure the following products after all other EPM System products are configured: • Data Relationship Management • Financial Data Quality Management • Data Integration Management The configuration sequence for various deployment scenarios is described in the following sections. After completing the configuration, you must perform the post configuration tasks required for your product. These tasks are discussed in succeeding topics and lessons.

Configuring Products on a Single Machine For all EPM System products installed on the machine, you can configure all EPM System products at the same time or individually.

y m

Foundation Services must be installed and configured successfully prior to configuring other products. If you are configuring multiple products on a machine simultaneously, EPM System Configurator runs the configuration in the correct order.

Configuring Products in a Distributed Environment

e d a

c A

Foundation Services and the Web server must be installed and configured successfully prior to configuring other products. Then, for each machine in the deployment, configure EPM System products either individually or altogether. EPM System Configurator runs the configuration in the correct order.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Configuring Products in an SSL-Enabled Environment If you are configuring EPM System products for SSL, the configuration sequence and selections you make during configuration depend on the type of SSL implementation you select. EPM System supports the following types of SSL configuration: • Full SSL Deployment (including data access) • SSL Terminating at the Web Server

e l c

• SSL Accelerators (Off-loading) • Two-way SSL

a r O 5-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

The EPM System deployment process automatically deploys Oracle's EPM System products in both SSL and non-SSL modes. For example, a default deployment deploys Shared Services to port 28080 (non-SSL mode) and 28083 (SSL mode). The SSL port is determined by adding 3 to the non-SSL port number. When deploying Shared Services, you must specify whether to use SSL for the entire EPM System. NOTE: If you choose to enable SSL for Shared Services, SSL mode is automatically selected for all products that share the Shared Services Registry. Selecting the Enable SSL for Communications check box in the EPM System Configurator to enable SSL does not configure your environment to use SSL. It only sets a flag in the Shared Services Registry to indicate that all EPM System products that use the repository must use the secure protocol (HTTPS) for communication. You must complete additional procedures to enable SSL for your environment. For more information about these procedures, refer to the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Release 11.1.2 Security Administration Guide.

Configuring Products in a Clustered Environment

y m

e d a

If you are clustering EPM System products, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance System High Availability Guide.

c A

Clustering Web Applications Complete the following tasks before setting up a cluster for a EPM System Web application:

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Set up a Java application server on each node included in the cluster. • Install the EPM System product on each node included in the cluster. Install to the same file system location on each machine. Using the same file system path on each physical machine in a cluster is important so that you can set these environment variables once for the entire cluster, rather than for each node in the cluster: - All OS—CLASSPATH and PATH

- UNIX—LD_LIBRARY_PATH, LIBPATH, or SHLIB_PATH

e l c

• Configure the EPM System product for manual deployment by selecting the Manual Deployment option when you run EPM System Configurator for each installation.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-9

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

During EPM System configuration, on the Application Server deployment Panel, click Setup, and then enter details on the Advanced Setup Panel. Performing this task creates a cluster in WebLogic. Note the following information about clustering Web applications: • EPM System Configurator configures a cluster for each managed server. • You should have only one cluster for Foundation Services, Performance Management Architect, Reporting and Analysis, Calculation Manager, and ERP Integrator. EPM System Configurator creates a cluster for these products and uses it as the default cluster. You cannot define a new cluster for these products. • For the Financial Reporting Web application, you can have only one active instance of the Scheduler component in a clustered environment. • For the Planning Web application, you set up clusters using the Manage Planning Clusters option in the Task Selection page. Clustering Essbase Clustering Essbase databases enables load balancing and failover support. Provider Services provides parallel clustering, a series of active, duplicate databases that respond to user requests. You create and manage Essbase clusters in Provider Services, which supports high availability, failover, and load-balancing capabilities of Essbase databases.

y m

e d a

You can cluster Essbase to provide an active-active configuration of identical databases that run on one or more Essbase servers. Identical databases have the same outline, data, and database objects (calculation scripts, report scripts, and so forth).

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

You can cluster Essbase Server to provide active-passive failover with write-back capability. An active-passive Essbase cluster can contain two Essbase servers. To install an additional Essbase server, you must install an additional instance of Essbase on another machine. Note that an Essbase cluster:

• Supports read-only operations on the databases; it does not support data write-back or outline modification. • Does not manage database replication capabilities, such as synchronizing the changes in one database across all databases in the cluster. After configuring a set of Essbase servers for clustering, you must define and enable the cluster under the Provider Services node in the Enterprise View of Administration Services Console.

e l c

a r O 5-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

To configure an Essbase cluster: During configuration with EPM System Configurator, on the Essbase Server Configuration page, click Cluster Setup and enter the cluster details. To enable clustered database components in Administration Ser vices Console: 1. From Enterprise View, under the Hyperion Provider Services node, select a provider. 2. Under the Provider node, select the Analytic Clusters node. 3. Under the Analytic Clusters node, select a cluster. 4. Right-click, and select Edit. 5. For each database component to be enabled, in the Analytic Cluster Panel, select the component, and click Enable. The status of the database component changes to Enabled. 6. Click Close.

y m

NOTE: Components that were part of the cluster definition when Provider Services was started can be enabled and disabled dynamically without restarting Provider Services. However, if you add a component to an existing cluster or create a cluster, you must restart Provider Services for the new cluster definition to take effect. You cannot enable or disable the newly added cluster components until you restart Provider Services.

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

To disable a database component in a cluster in Administration Ser vices Console: 1. From Enterprise View, under the Hyperion Provider Services node, select a provider. 2. Under the provider node, select the Essbase Clusters node. 3. Under the Essbase Clusters node, select a cluster. 4. Right-click, and select Edit.

5. For each component to be disabled, in the Essbase Cluster Panel, select the component, and click Disable.

e l c

a r O

6. Click Close.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-11

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Clustering Planning A cluster is a name for a group of Planning applications and can contain one or many applications. Each application gets associated with a cluster when an application is created. Note that you must configure the Planning database before you can create or edit a cluster. The default cluster is created after you complete all the other Planning configuration tasks. You create, edit, delete, activate, reassociate clusters through the Manage Planning Clusters task in EPM System Configurator. Configuring Reporting and Analysis in a Distributed Environment Considerations for Reporting and Analysis in a distributed environment: • You need only one configuration of Reporting and Analysis Framework services and Interactive Reporting services on each host. You can replicate these services by using the Administer section of Workspace. Select Navigate then Administer, then Reporting and Analysis, and then Services. • Enable only one Reporting and Analysis Logging Service. Multiple Logging Services can affect where the logs are sent.

y m

e d a

• Multiple Global Service Manager (GSM) instances are supported.

• When enabling the Reporting and Analysis Publisher Service, enable a corresponding Repository Service on the same configuration host.

c A

• If you are running multiple instances of the Reporting and Analysis Repository Service, make sure that all instances share the file system location. You can specify the file system location during configuration with EPM System Configurator, or by using the Administer section in Workspace. If you are running this services as a Windows service, use a UNC path instead of a mapped drive to prevent potential permissions errors that can occur when Windows attempts to create a mapped drive at startup.

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

a r O 5-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Performing Silent Configurations You run the configTool.cmd file to perform silent configurations.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Performing Silent Configurations

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Silent configurations automate the configuration process so that you can configure EPM System products on multiple computers without manually specifying configuration settings on each machine. To enable silent configurations, record your configuration settings in a response file. You can then run a silent configuration from the command line, using the configuration options that were saved in the response file.

Recording Response Files

You can record response files in the following ways:

e l c

• Record the configuration settings while performing a configuration. • Record the configuration settings without performing a configuration.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-13

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

To record the configuration settings while performing a configuration: 1. Navigate to the directory that contains EPM System Configurator. By default, the directory is EPM_ORACLE_HOME/common/config/version_number. 2. From a command line, run one of the folliwng commands: • configTool.cmd -record file name for Windows • configTool.sh -record file name for UNIX where file name includes an absolute path or file name for the response file. If you do not specify a file name, EPM System Configurator creates the file for you: EPM_ORACLE_HOME/common/config/version_number/configResponse.xml. EPM System Configurator is launched. 3. Proceed through EPM System Configurator, specifying the options that you want to record. On the Configuration Confirmation Panel, click Next to perform the configuration.

y m

NOTE: When you are recording silent configurations, you can proceed through EPM System Configurator only one time. (You cannot go back to the Product Selection Panel to continue with more configuration tasks.) If you return to the Task Selection Panel, the response file is rerecorded.

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

The products are configured according to the specified installation settings, and the configuration settings are recorded in the specified response file in XML format. Passwords are saved in encrypted format in the response file. To record configuration settings without performing a configuration: 1. Launch EPM System Configurator.

2. Proceed through EPM System Configurator, specifying the options that you want to record. On the Configuration Confirmation Panel, click Save to record the settings in a response file.

e l c

3. Browse to a location to save the response file.

a r O

4. Specify a file name for the response file, and click Save.

5-14

The response file is saved. Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Modifying Response Files After you create a response file, you can modify it to customize the configuration options for certain machines. TIP: To change the password later, open the response file in a text editor, enter the password in clear text, and change the parameter to false. The next time you perform a silent configuration using this response file, EPM System Configurator encrypts the password and reverts the parameter to true.

Executing Response Files After creating and modifying a response file, you execute it to perform a silent configuration. To execute a response file:

y m

1. Copy the response file to the machine on which you want to run the configuration. You can also copy the file to a network drive that is accessible from the machines on which you want to configure. 2. From the command line, enter one of the following commands: • configTool.cmd -silent file name for Windows • configTool.sh -silent file name for UNIX

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Where file name includes an absolute path or file name for the response file. The configuration runs in the background.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-15

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Running EPM System Configurator for Shared Services

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Running EPM System Configurator for Shared Services

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

When you run EPM System Configurator for Shared Services, you perform the following tasks: • Configure EPM System Common Settings

• Configure the Shared Services and Registry Database Connection • Register Oracle Configuration Manager

• Set Shared Services Admin User Password • Configure the Web Server

e l c

a r O 5-16

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Configuring the Shared Services and Registry Database Connection

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Configuring the Shared Services and Registry Database Connection

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

The first time you configure EPM System products, you configure a database for use by Foundation Services, which includes the Shared Services Registry. When you configure the Shared Services and Registry database, EPM System Configurator ensures that the database is connected and is a supported database type. If a database is detected, you may be prompted to select whether to use the detected database or create a database.

Shared Services Registry

The Shared Services Registry is stored in the database during Foundation Services configuration. It is created the first time you configure EPM System products, and it simplifies configuration by storing and reusing the following information for most EPM System products that you install.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-17

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

• Initial configuration values such as installation directories, database settings, and deployment settings • Host computer names, ports, servers, and URLs that you use to implement multiple, integrated, Hyperion products and components • Dependent service data Configuration changes you make for one product are automatically applied to other products used in the deployment. You can view and manage the contents of the Shared Services Registry using Lifecycle Management in the Shared Services Console. For more information, see Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Lifecycle Management Guide. When you upgrade from a previous release of EPM System products, EPM System Configurator updates the Shared Services Registry for products that you upgrade.

Specifying Database Connection Information The following table describes the fields that you must complete to configure the Shared Services and Registry database:

y m

Field

Description

Connect to a previously configured Shared Services database/

When you first configure the Shared Services and Registry database, select “Perform 1st-time configuration of Shared Services database.” This database includes the Shared Services Registry, which is used to store common information for all products.

Perform 1st-time configuration of Shared Services database

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

When you configure in a distributed environment, you must configure the Shared Services database on every machine. On the first machine, you are setting up the Shared Services Registry. For configurations on subsequent machines, select “Connect to a previously configured Shared Services database.” In this case, you are letting the machine know the location of the Shared Services Registry. For some products, you can use this same database to store product information. In this case, each product has its own table in this database. See “Installation Planning Checklist” in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Start Here for additional information about database preparation for each product.

Database Type Server

a r O

e l c

5-18

Select a database type from the list of supported types. Specify the name of the database server where the Shared Services database should be created.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Field

Description

Port

Select the default, or specify a custom server port number on which the Shared Services database listens.

SID/Service Name

Specify the name of the Shared Services database. If you are using an Oracle RAC database, specify the RAC service name.

Username

Enter the database user name.

Password

Enter the database user password.

Advanced Options (Optional)

Click to specify additional information, such as JDBC URL attributes and SSL information.

• Initial configuration values such as installation directories, database settings, and deployment settings • Host computer names, ports, servers, and URLs that you use to implement multiple, integrated, Hyperion products and components • Dependent service data

y m

Configuration changes you make for one product are automatically applied to other products used in the deployment.

e d a

You can view and manage the contents of the Shared Services Registry using Lifecycle Management in the Shared Services Console. For more information, see Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Lifecycle Management Guide.

c A

When you upgrade from a previous release of EPM System products, EPM System Configurator updates the Shared Services Registry for products that you upgrade.

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-19

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Configuring EPM System Common Settings

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring EPM System Common Settings

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Specify settings for all products on all machines that have been identified in the Shared Services Registry. If you configure on another machine and change any of these options, your new selections apply for all products and machines you have not configured. If you reconfigure on a machine, the new settings apply to any products you reconfigure and to future configurations.

e l c

a r O 5-20

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

The following table describes the options for configuring common settings: Field

Description

Create Windows Services for configured components

Select to configure each service as a Windows service that starts automatically when you start Windows.

(Windows only) Use SSL for Web application server communications

Depending on your SSL implementation, select to use SSL communication for all Web applications. If this option is selected, URLs are in the form https.

(Requires manual configuration)

Note: Selecting this option does not enable secure communication for the Web application server, and does not create and load certificates into JREs and JDKs. See Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide for more information.

Mail Server Host

For products that integrate an e-mail feature, which uses standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) protocol, specify the outgoing mail (SMTP) server. To enable e-mail alerts, you must specify the SMTP server name.

Port

Specify the mail server port number, or accept the default value. If you are using SSL to communicate with the mail server, enter an SSL port.

Use SSL to communicate with mail server

Select to use SSL communication for all e-mail communication.

Mail server requires authentication to send email

Specify whether the mail server requires authentication, and then specify a user name and password.

User Name Password Admin Email

e l c

y m

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Specify the user name for the SMTP server. Specify the password for the SMTP server.

Specify the administrator's e-mail address to use for notifications.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-21

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Deploying to the Application Server

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Deploying to the Application Server

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

EPM System Configurator deploys each application to the WebLogic Server domain you specified. For a new domain, the domain is created when the first application is deployed. Each application runs in a separate JVM, except for Shared Services, and EPM Workspace, which run together and are deployed to the same managed server. The following table lists the options to define the WebLogic Server domain: Field

Description

Deploy Web applications to an existing domain/Define a new domain to deploy the Web applications

Select whether to deploy Web applications to an existing domain or to a new domain.

Admin Host

For an existing domain, specify the Admin Host.

e l c

a r O 5-22

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Field

Description

Domain Name

To define a new domain, enter a domain name. The default domain name is EPMSystem. To deploy to an existing domain, specify the domain to use for deployment.

Admin Port

Accept the default port, or, to change the default, enter a port number that does not conflict with other applications installed on your machine.

Admin User

Enter the admin user name for the domain. By default, the admin user is set to epm_admin.

Admin Password

Enter the admin password or enter a new password for a new domain.

Confirm Admin Password

If you are defining a new domain, confirm the admin password.

Note the following application server deployment information: • You deploy multiple products to a single domain. • By default, EPM System Configurator deploys 32-bit binaries to 32-bit application servers on 32–bit operating systems, and 64-bit binaries to 64-bit application servers on 64–bit operating systems. • EPM System Configurator deploys the applications to MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/domains/.

y m

e d a

c A

• The EPM Workspace Web application and the Shared Services Web application are deployed when you select the Hyperion Foundation Deploy to Application Server task.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• If you are implementing a custom authentication module, you must include its Java archive (.jar) in the EPM Product classpath. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide for detailed procedures to implement a custom authentication module. • Start and stop scripts are created in MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/bin/.

• For each application, in MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/bin/deploymentScripts there is a setCustomParamsProduct.bat file (.sh extension for UNIX), where you can change JAVA_OPTIONS when using start scripts.

e l c

• EPM System Configurator creates a cluster for each managed server.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-23

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Registering with Oracle Configuration Manager

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Registering with Oracle Configuration Manager

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Oracle Configuration Manager collects machine configuration and installed Oracle software information on a regular basis and uploads to it My Oracle Support. EPM System Configurator displays this page on the first machine you configure and uses the values for each additional machine in the deployment. The following table describes options for registering for Oracle Configuration Manager: Field

Description

Email

Enter the email address to use for notifications from MyOracle Support.

View Details

e l c

Click or select to see information about Oracle Support policies.

a r O 5-24

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Field

Description

I wish to receive security updates via My Oracle Support

Specify whether you want to receive security updates.

My Oracle Support password

Enter your My Oracle Support password.

NOTE: EPM System Installer installs Oracle Configuration Manager for you in EPM_ORACLE_HOME/ccr.. For more information about Oracle Configuration Manager, see http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/ocm.html.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-25

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Setting the Shared Services Admin User Password

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Setting the Shared Services Admin User Password

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

EPM System Configurator creates a preprovisioned user called admin that enables you to log on to Shared Services after configuration to create and provision users. EPM System Configurator requires you to specify a new admin password during configuration. After configuration, you can make provisioning changes to the admin user. To set the password for the admin user, enter the password in the Password field, and confirm it by re-entering the password it in the Re-Type Password field.

e l c

a r O 5-26

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Configuring the Foundation Services Web Server

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Configuring the Foundation Services Web Server

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

You configure the Web server only on the machine on which you want to run the Web server. If you have already configured the Web server and you deploy any additional products, you must run EPM System Configurator again and select the Foundation Services “Configure Web Server” task. The following table describes the options for the Web server configuration: Field

Description

Select Web Server

Select the Web Server.

HTTP Port

Specify the Web server port. If you use SSL, make sure the port number you enter is a secure port.

e l c

Location of Oracle HTTP server

Specify or browse to the location of the Web server.

Component

Review the components for which the Web server is being configured.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-27

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Configuring External User Directories

Authentication directory

User Management console

y m

Oracle Hyperion products

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring External User Directories

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

External authentication enables you to configure Shared Services to use a separate authentication directory; the directory contains corporate user information to authenticate EPM System product users. Each EPM System product enables external authentication by referencing the Shared Services configuration during the product configuration process. Users can log on once to access multiple Hyperion products (single sign-on). When you install and deploy Shared Services, Native Directory, the default user directory for EPM System products, is configured automatically. You can configure external user directories to support single sign-on (SSO) and authorization for the products that you install. Shared Services Console writes the configuration information to the CSS.xml file that is packaged with Shared Services.

e l c

a r O 5-28

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

You can perform the following user directory management and configuration tasks in the Shared Services Console: • Configure user directories • Test user directory connections • Edit user directory settings • Delete user directories • Manage the user directory search order After configuring the directories, you must synchronize them with the Shared Services database.

Native Directory By default, Native Directory contains one user account, admin, with a default password of password. With this user account, you can manage Native Directory user accounts: • Create users

y m

• Modify, delete, deactivate user accounts • Provision and deprovision users and groups

e d a

• Generate provisioning reports

External Directories

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

You cannot manage external directory users and groups in Shared Services Console. You can configure Shared Services to work with the users and groups that you created in external user directories. The following external directories are supported:

• Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)-enabled user directories, such as Oracle Internet Directory • Sun Java System Directory Service 6.3

• Microsoft Active Directory 2003 and 2008 • IBM Tivoli Director Server 6.2

e l c

• Novell eDirectory 8.8 • CA Siteminder 6

a r O

• Relational databases (Oracle database 10.2.0.04 and later, IBM DBs 9.1 and 9.5, Microsoft SQL Server 2005 and 2008)

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-29

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Configuring MSAD or LDAP User Directories

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring MSAD or LDAP User Directories

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

To support SSO and authorization, you must configure external user directories. From Shared Services Console, you can perform several tasks related to configuring and managing user directories. To configure Oracle Internet Director y, MSAD, or other LDAP-enabled user directories: 1. Using a browser, access the following URL: http://Web_server_name:port_number/interop

where Web_server_name is the name of the computer where the Web server used by Foundation Services is running, and port_number is the Web server port.

e l c

2. Click Launch Application.

a r O 5-30

The Shared Services console login page is displayed.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

3. Enter your user name and password, and click Log On. NOTE: Initially, the only user who can access Shared Services Console is admin (the password for admin is specified in EPM System Configurator when deploying Foundation Services). 4. Select Administration, then Configure User Directories. The Defined User Directories screen is displayed. This screen lists all configured user directories, including Native Directory. 5. Click Add. 6. Under Directory Type, select an option: • Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) to configure an LDAP-based user directory other than Active Directory. • Microsoft Active Directory (MSAD) to configure Active Directory.

y m

7. Click Next. The Connection Information screen for the selected user directory type is displayed.

e d a

8. Enter the required parameters. The following table describes the parameters for your external authentication provider: Field

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I Description

Directory Server

c A

Select a user directory. Select Other if you are using a user directory that is not listed. This property is automatically selected if you chose Active Directory in step 6.

Name

Enter a descriptive name for the user directory. This is used to identify a specific user directory if multiple user directories are configured.

DNS Lookup Host Name

e l c

Host Name

a r O Port

Active Directory only: Select this option to enable DNS lookup. Active Directory only: Select this option to enable static host name lookup. Enter the DNS name or IP address of the user directory server. Use the fully qualified domain name if the user directory is to be used to support SSO from SiteMinder. Enter the port number where the user directory is running.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-31

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Field

Description

SSL Enabled

Select to enable secure communication with this user directory. The user directory must be configured for secure communication.

Base DN

Enter the distinguished name (DN) of the node where the search for users and groups should begin. You can also use the Fetch DNs button to list available base DNs and then select the appropriate base DN from the list. Oracle recommends that you select the lowest DN that contains all EPM System product users and groups.

ID Attribute

Enter a unique user attribute. The recommended value of this attribute is automatically set for OID orclguid, SunONE (nsuniqueid), IBM Directory Server (Ibm-entryUuid), Novell eDirectory (GUID), and Active Directory (ObjectGUID). You may change the default value to DN if necessary. Note: Oracle does not recommend the use of DN as the ID Attribute because it can cause users and groups to lose provisioning data if they move from the current organizational unit to another.

Maximum Size

y m

Enter the maximum number of results that a search can return. If this value is greater than that supported by the user directory settings, the user directory value overrides this value.

e d a

For user directories other than Active Directory, leave this blank to retrieve all users and groups that meet the search criteria.

c A

For Active Directory, set this value to 0 to retrieve all users and groups that meet the search criteria.

Trusted

Anonymous Bind

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Select this check box to indicate that this provider is a trusted SSO source. SSO tokens from trusted sources do not contain the user's password. Select this check box to indicate that Shared Services can bind anonymously to the user directory to search for users and groups. Can be used only if the user directory allows anonymous binds. If this option is not selected, you must specify in the User DN an account with sufficient access permissions to search the directory where user information is stored. Oracle recommends that you do not use anonymous bind.

User DN

e l c

a r O 5-32

Enter the distinguished name of the user that Shared Services should use to bind with the user directory. This distinguished name must have read privileges within the Base DN. Note: This box is disabled if you select Anonymous Bind.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Field

Description

Append Base DN

Select this check box to append the base DN to the User DN. If you are using Directory Manager account as the User DN, do not append Base DN. Note: This box is disabled if you select Anonymous Bind.

Password

Enter the User DN password. Note: This box is disabled if you select Anonymous Bind.

Show Advanced Options

Select this check box to display advanced options. For more information about advanced options, see Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Release 11.1.2 User and Role Security Guide.

9. Click Next. The MSAD User Configuration screen is displayed.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-33

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Configuring MSAD or LDAP Users

You can use the Auto Configure field to quickly retrieve User information.

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring MSAD or LDAP Users

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

Shared Services uses the User Configuration properties to create a user URL that is used to determine the node where search for users begins. Using this URL speeds up the search. TIP: The User URL should not point to an alias. EPM System security requires that the user URL points to an actual user and not its alias.

e l c

a r O 5-34

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Oracle recommends that you use Auto Configure to retrieve the required information. If you want to enter the User information manually, the following table contains the field definitions: Field

Description

User RDN

Enter the Relative DN of the user. Each component of a DN is called an RDN and represents a branch in the directory tree. The RDN of a user is generally the equivalent of the uid or cn. Example: ou=people

Login Attribute

Enter the attribute that stores the login name of the user. Users use the value of this attribute as the User Name while logging into EPM System products. Example: uid

First Name Attribute

Enter the attribute that stores the user’s first name. Example: givenName

Last Name Attribute

Enter the attribute that stores the user’s last name. Example: sn

Email Attribute

Example: mail Object Class

y m

Enter the attribute that stores the user’s email address.

e d a

Enter the object classes of the user (the mandatory and optional attributes that can be associated with the user). Shared Services uses the object classes listed in this screen in the search filter. Using these object classes, Shared Services should find all users who should be provisioned.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

You can manually add additional object classes if needed. To add an object class, enter the object class name into the Object Class box and click Add. To delete object classes, select the object class and click Remove. Example: person, organizationalPerson, inetorgperson

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-35

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Field

Description

Show Advanced Options

Select this check box to enable the use of a filter to retrieve users during search operations.

Filter to Limit Users

Enter an LDAP query that retrieves only the users that are to be provisioned with EPM System product roles. For example, the LDAP query (uid=Hyp*) retrieves only users whose names start with the prefix Hyp. The User Configuration screen validates the User RDN and recommends the use of a user filter, if required. After entering the user filter, click Execute Filter to validate the query by getting a count of the number of users that will be retrieved using the filter. The user filter is used to limit the number of users returned during a query. It is especially important if the node identified by the user RDN contains many users that need not be provisioned. User filters can be designed to exclude the users that are not to be provisioned, thereby improving performance.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 5-36

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Configuring MSAD or LDAP Groups

You can use the Auto Configure field to quickly retrieve Group information.

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring MSAD or LDAP Groups

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

Shared Services uses the uses the Group Configuration properties to create a URL to determine the node where searches for groups begin. Using this URL speeds up the search. TIP: The group URL should not point to an alias. EPM System security requires that the group URL points to an actual group and not its alias. Data entry in the Group Configuration screen is optional. If you do not enter the group URL settings, Shared Services searches within the Base DN to locate groups, which can negatively affect performance, especially if the user directory contains many groups.

e l c

If you do not plan to provision groups, or if users are not categorized into groups on the user directory, you can clear the Support Groups checkbox to disable the fields on this screen.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-37

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

If you are supporting groups, Oracle recommends that you use the Auto Configure field to retrieve the required information. If you want to enter the group information manually, the following table contains the field definitions: Field

Description

Group RDN

Enter the Relative DN of the group. Each component of a DN is called an RDN and represents a branch in the directory tree. This value, which is relative to the Base DN, is used as the group URL. Specify a Group RDN that identifies the lowest user directory node in which all the groups that you plan to provision are available. The Group RDN has a significant impact on login and search performance. Because it is the starting point for all group searches, you must identify the lowest possible node in which all groups for EPM System products are available. To ensure optimum performance, the number of groups present within the Group RDN should not exceed 10,000. If more groups are present, use a group filter to retrieve only the groups you want to provision. Note: Shared Services displays a warning if the number of available groups within the Group URL exceeds 10,000. Example: ou=Groups

Name Attribute Object Class

e d a

Enter the attribute that stores the group name. Example: cn

y m

c A

Enter the object classes of the group. Shared Services uses the object classes listed in this screen in the search filter. Using these object classes, Shared Services should find all groups associated with the user.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

If needed, you can manually add additional object classes by entering the object class name into the Object class text box and clicking Add. To delete object classes, select the object class and click Remove. Example: groupofuniquenames?uniquemember

e l c

a r O 5-38

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Field

Description

Show Advanced Options

Select this check box to enable the use of a filter to retrieve groups during search operations.

Filter to Limit Groups

Enter an LDAP query that retrieves only the groups that are to be provisioned with EPM System product roles. For example, the LDAP query (|(cn=Hyp*)(cn=Admin*)) retrieves only groups whose names start with the prefix Hyp or Admin. After entering the group filter, click Execute Filter to validate the filter by getting a count of the number of groups that will be retrieved by the filter. With the group filter, you limit the number of groups returned during a query. It is especially important if the node identified by the Group RDN contains a large number of groups that need not be provisioned. Filters can be designed to exclude the groups that are not to be provisioned, improving performance.

Testing User Directory Connections After configuring a user directory, test the connection to ensure that Shared Services can connect to the user directory using the current settings. To test a user director y connection:

e d a

1. From Shared Service Console, select Administration, and then Configure User Directories. The Defined User Directories screen is displayed.

y m

c A

2. From the list of user directories, select an external user directory configuration to test. 3. Click Test.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

A status message indicating the test result is displayed. 4. Click OK.

Managing User Directory Search Order When you configure an external user directory, Shared Services automatically adds the user directory to the search order and assigns it the next available search sequence. The search order is used to cycle through configured user directories when EPM System searches for users and groups.

e l c

You can remove a user directory from the search order, in which case Shared Services automatically reassigns the search order of the remaining directories. User directories not included in the search order are not used to support authentication and provisioning.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-39

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

NOTE: Shared Services terminates the search for the user or group when it encounters the specified account. Oracle recommends that the corporate directory that contains most of the EPM System users be placed at the top of the search order. If a user has multiple accounts within a user directory,EPM System retrieves the account that the search first encounters. By default, Native Directory is set as the first directory in the search order. Additional user directories are given the next available sequence number in the search order. You can perform the following tasks to manage the search order: • Add a User Directory to a search order • Change the search order • Remove a search order assignment

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 5-40

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Provisioning Users and Groups Authentication Oracle Hype rion product

CSS CSS ACL

Provisioning Get provisioning information

Registration

Shared Servic es

Registration

E PM Configurator

Provisioning and Regis tration

Externa l user directory

y m

Relational database

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Provisioning Users and Groups

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

User provisioning is the process of granting roles and access control to EPM System product users. A role is a set of permissions that determines user access to product functions. Each product provides several default roles tailored to suit various business needs. Predefined roles from each application registered with Shared Services are available from Shared Services Console. These roles are used for provisioning. You may also create additional roles that aggregate the default roles to suit specific requirements. The process of granting users and groups specific access permissions to EPM System resources is called provisioning. Provisioning is managed at the user or group levels by Provisioning Managers or Shared Services Administrators assigning one or more EPM System application roles to a user or group.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-41

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Available Roles A role is a construct, similar to an access control list, that defines the access permissions granted to users and groups to perform functions on Oracle's Hyperion resources. It is a combination of resource or resource types. Access to Oracle's Hyperion application resources is restricted. Users can access application resources only after a role that provides access is assigned to the user or to the group to which the user belongs. Access restrictions based on roles enable administrators to control and manage application access. As the Shared Services administrator or provisioning manager for an application, only you can provision users. Based on roles assigned, users can perform specific tasks and access content in various applications. You manage provisioning at the user or group level; that is, you select users or groups and then provision them with roles for applications or for Shared Services global roles.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 5-42

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Global Roles Global roles are Shared Services roles that enable users to perform certain tasks within the Shared Services Console. The following table describes some global rules: Role

Description

Administrator

The Administrator role provides control over all products that integrate with Shared Services. It enables more control over security than any other Hyperion product roles and should therefore be assigned sparingly. Administrators can perform all administrative tasks in Shared Services Console and can provision themselves. This role grants broad access to all applications registered with Shared Services. The Administrator role is, by default, assigned to the admin Native Directory user, which is the only user available after you deploy Shared Services. This user account is initially used to create accounts for other administrators. For example, the Shared Services Administrator assigns other administrative users either the Directory Manager or Provisioning Manager role (a product specific role assigned for individual applications). In turn, these users manage general user access to applications.

Directory Manager

y m

The Directory Manager role creates and manages users and groups within Native Directory.

e d a

The recommended practice is to grant one user the Directory Manager role and another user the Provisioning Manager role. Otherwise, Directory Managers can provision themselves. For example, if a user is assigned both roles for a Financial Management application, this user can create a new user, assign the user any role within the application, and log in as the new user, thereby granting personal access to the Financial Management application.

Project Manager LCM Manager

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

The Project Manager role creates and manages projects within Shared Services. The LCM Manager role executes the Life Cycle Management Utility to promote artifacts and data across product environments and operating systems.

Predefined Roles Predefined roles are built-in roles in Hyperion products. You cannot delete these roles from the product. Predefined roles are registered with Shared Services during the application registration process.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-43

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Aggregated Roles Aggregated roles are custom roles that aggregate multiple product roles within an Oracle Hyperion product. An aggregated role consists of multiple roles, including other aggregated roles. For example, a Shared Services Administrator or Provisioning Manager can create a role for Planning that combines the Planner and View User roles into an aggregated role. Aggregating roles can simplify the administration of products that have a large number of granular roles. You cannot create an aggregated role that spans products, and you cannot include global Shared Services roles in aggregated roles. Aggregated roles are also known as custom roles.

Provisioning Sequence Shared Services communicates with the following repositories for provisioning: • The Shared Services relational database contains product registration information. • The OpenLDAP database contains role-provisioning information. • The product repositories contain authentication privileges that are product-specific.

y m

• The external authentication directory contains user credentials and group hierarchy information.

e d a

When you log on to a Hyperion product, the product performs the following authentication tasks:

c A

1. The product checks the user credentials in a user directory (native or external).

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

This mandates each Hyperion application user to have an account on the user directory. 2. The product communicates with Shared Services to check the verified information against the role provisioning information in the OpenLDAP database. 3. The product checks the verified OpenLDAP credentials against the product credentials. To provision users or groups:

1. Launch Shared Services console by selecting Start, then Programs, then Hyperion, then Foundation Services, then Shared Services Console.

e l c

2. Click on your user directory and search for users or groups.

a r O

3. Right-click the user or group and select Provision.

5-44

The Provisioning tab is displayed. Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

4. Optional: Select a view. Roles can be displayed in a hierarchy (tree) or a list. You must drill down the hierarchy to display available roles. The list view lists all available roles but does not show their hierarchy. 5. Select one or more roles, and click Add. The selected roles are displayed in Selected Roles. 6. Click Save. A dialog box, which indicates that the provisioning process is successful, is displayed. 7. Click OK.

Deprovisioning Users and Groups When you deprovision users or groups, you remove the assigned roles from an application. Shared Services Administrators can deprovision roles from several applications. Provisioning managers of applications can deprovision roles from their applications. For example, assume that the group Sales_West is provisioned with roles from Planning. If this group is deprovisioned by a Planning Provisioning Manager, only the roles from Planning are removed.

y m

To deprovision users or groups:

e d a

c A

1. Launch Shared Services console by selecting Start, then Programs, then Hyperion, then Foundation Services, then Shared Services Console.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

2. Locate a user or group to provision by clicking on your user directory and searching for users or groups. 3. Right-click the user or group, and select Deprovision.

4. On the Deprovisioning tab, perform an action, and click OK. • Select one or more applications.

• Select all available applications by selecting Check All. 5. Click OK.

6. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.

e l c

7. Click OK in the Deprovision Summary page.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-45

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Generating Provisioning Reports

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Generating Provisioning Reports

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You can report on user-provisioning information in Shared Services Console. Provisioning reports can contain information on users and groups assigned to roles from selected applications and roles from selected applications assigned to one or more users. To generate provisioning reports in Shared Ser vices Console: 1. Select Administration, then View Report. 2. Enter report generation parameters. 3. Click Create Report.

e l c

The report is displayed on the Provision Report tab.

a r O

4. Click Print Preview.

5-46

The report is displayed in View Report window.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

5. Click Print. 6. Select a printer, and click Print. 7. Click Close.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-47

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Creating Application Groups Application groups are containers for Hyperion applications.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Creating Application Groups

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

An application group is a container for Oracle's Hyperion applications. For example, an application group may contain a Planning application and one or more Reporting and Analysis applications. Applications that are registered with Shared Services but do not yet belong to a application group are listed under Default Application Group node within the Application Groups node in Shared Services Console. An application can belong to only one application group, but a application group may contain multiple applications. You can start the provisioning process even if the applications are not assigned to application groups. You can provision applications listed in the Default Application Group node and then move them to a application group without losing provisioning information.

e l c

a r O 5-48

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

NOTE: You must be a Shared Services Administrator or Project Manager to create and manage application groups. Shared Services Administrators can work with all registered applications but a Project Manager can work only with the application for which that person is the project manager.

To create an application group: 1. Launch Shared Services console by selecting Start, then Programs, then Hyperion, then Foundation Services, and then Shared Services Console. 2. Right-click Application Groups in the Object Palette, and select New. The New Application Group page opens. 3. Enter a unique application group name in Name text box and an optional description in Description box. 4. Perform the following actions to assign applications to this application group:

y m

a. From List Applications in Application Group, select DefaultApplicationGroup or an existing application group.

e d a

b. Click Update List. The Available Applications list displays the applications that you can assign to the application group.

c A

c. From Available Applications, select the applications to assign to the project and click Add.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

The selected applications appear in the Assigned Applications list. 5. Click Finish.

6. Perform an action:

• Click Create Another to create another application group. • Click OK to close the status page.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

5-49

Lesson 5

Configuring Shared Services

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Describe EPM System Configurator • Describe the Configuration Sequence • Configure Shared Services • Configure the Shared Services and Registry Database Connection • Configure EPM System Common Settings • Deploy EPM System products to a Weblogic domain • Register with Oracle Configuration Manager

e d a

• Set the Shared Services Admin User Password • Configure Foundation Services Web Server • Configure external user directories

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Configure MSAD or LDAP User Directories

y m

c A

• Provision users and groups • Create Application Groups

e l c

a r O 5-50

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

6

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Configure Performance Management Architect • Configure Calculation Manager

y m

e d a

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

Configuring Performance Management Architect

Server components

RDBMS

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

y m

e d a

c A

Configuring Performance Management Architect

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

You perform the following tasks to configure Performance Management Architect: • Configure Database

• Deploy to Application Server

• Configure Interface Data Source (Optional)

The Interface Datasource Configuration task is required only if you want to use interface tables in Performance Management Architect. Interface tables are database tables used to import data and metadata from external systems into Architect.

e l c

a r O 6-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

Configuring the Performance Management Architect Database

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Configuring the Performance Management Architect Database

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Specify the database settings to use for the products that you selected on the Task Selection Panel. For ease of deployment and simplicity, for a new installation, you can use one database for all products (the default when you configure all products at the same time). If you want to use a different database for each product, perform the Configure Database task separately for each product.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

6-3

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

The following table describes the fields that you must complete to configure a database for Performance Management Architect: Field

Description

Database connection information

Confirm the list of products for which you want to configure the database. The list is determined by the products that you initially selected to configure. To create different databases for each product, select only one product at a time and run EPM System Configurator again to configure the database for another product.

• Use an already defined database

Select a previously configured database, or specify the name of a new database to configure.

• Create a new database

Note: This task assumes that you already created the database. It does not create the database.

Database Type

Select a database type from the list of supported types.

Server

Specify the name of the computer or server that is hosting the database.

Port

Select the default, or specify a custom server port number on which the database listens.

SID/Service Name

Specify the name of the database.

e d a

If you are using an Oracle RAC database, specify the RAC service name. Username

Enter the database user name.

Password

Enter the database user password.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Advanced Options (Optional)

e l c

y m

c A

Click to specify additional information, such as JDBC URL attributes and SSL information.

a r O 6-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

Deploying Performance Management Architect to the Application Server

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Deploying Performance Management Architect to the Application Server

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Specify the application server options. The following table describes the options for a WebLogic application server deployment configuration: Field

Description

Ear/War

Select the components to deploy.

Name

Displays the server name.

Port

Accept the default port, or enter a port number that does not conflict with other applications installed on this machine.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

6-5

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

Field

Description

SSL Port

Accept the default port or specify the SSL port to use for deployment. Specifying this port sets up SSL using the Java application server's default certificates. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide for recommendations on updating the Java application server with a valid certificate.

Set up

Click Set up to specify the logical address that the products use to connect to the Web application server. Select this option when the Web applications do not communicate with the Web application server directly, as in the following scenarios: • You set up a cluster with a load balancer. • You are using an SSL offloader.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 6-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

Creating an Interface Datasource

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Creating an Interface Datasource

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Creating an interface datasource is required if you want to use interface tables in Performance Management Architect. Interface tables provide a database interface that enable you to import metadata and data from external systems into the Dimension Library. You configure the tables by creating data source links that can be used during import profile creation and data synchronization. NOTE: This task is optional for the initial configuration.

You can configure an interface data source only on the machine on which the Dimension Server is installed. You must register with Shared Services before you can perform this task.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

6-7

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

NOTE: Make sure to use a database other than your repository database for the interface datasource. The following table describes the options for configuring the Performance Management Architect interface datasource: Field

Description

Database type

Displays the database type.

Datasource name

Accept the default name, or enter a name for the datasource.

Server

Accept the default name, or enter the name of the server hosting the database. (The default name is based on the database type.)

Port

Select the default, or enter the port number of the server hosting the database. (The default port is based on the database type.).

SID/Service Name

Enter the database name to use as an interface data source.

User

Enter the database user name.

Password

Enter the database user password.

Create interface tables

Select to create the interface tables in the database. Oracle recommends that you select this option.

e l c

y m

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 6-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

Configuring Calculation Manager

RDBMS

Server components

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring Calculation Manager

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

You perform the following tasks to configure Calculation Manager: • Configure Database

• Deploy to Application Server

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

6-9

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

Configuring the Calculation Manager Database

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring the Calculation Manager Database

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Specify the database settings to use for the products that you selected on the Task Selection Panel. For ease of deployment and simplicity, for a new installation, you can use one database for all products (the default when you configure all products at the same time). If you want to use a different database for each product, perform the Configure Database task separately for each product.

e l c

a r O 6-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

The following table describes the fields that you must complete to configure a database for Calculation Manager: Field

Description

Database configuration for the following products

Confirm the list of products for which you want to configure the database. The list is determined by the products that you initially selected to configure. To create different databases for each product, select only one product at a time and run EPM System Configurator again to configure the database for another product.

• Use an already defined database

Select a previously configured database, or specify the name of a new database to configure.

• Create a new database

Note: This task assumes that you already created the database. It does not create the database.

Database Type

Select a database type from the list of supported types.

Server

Specify the name of the computer or server that is hosting the database.

Port

Select the default, or specify a custom server port number on which the database listens.

SID/Service Name

Specify the name of the database.

e d a

If you are using an Oracle RAC database, specify the RAC service name. Username

Enter the database user name.

Password

Enter the database user password.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Advanced Options (Optional)

e l c

y m

c A

Click to specify additional information, such as JDBC URL attributes and SSL information.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

6-11

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

Deploying Calculation Manager to the Application Server

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Deploying Calculation Manager to the Application Server

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Specify the application server options. The following table describes the options for a WebLogic application server deployment configuration: Field

Description

Ear/War Name

Select the components to deploy. Displays the server name.

Port

Accept the default port, or enter a port number that does not conflict with other applications installed on this machine.

e l c

a r O 6-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

Field

Description

SSL Port

Accept the default port or specify the SSL port to use for deployment. Specifying this port sets up SSL using the Java application server's default certificates. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide for recommendations on updating the Java application server with a valid certificate.

Set up

Click Set up to specify the logical address the products use to connect to the Web application server. Select this option when the Web applications do not communicate with the Web application server directly, as in the following scenarios: • You set up a cluster with a load balancer. • You are using an SSL offloader.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

6-13

Lesson 6

Configuring Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Configure Performance Management Architect • Configure Calculation Manager

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 6-14

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

7

Configuring Essbase

7

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Configure Essbase • Externalize users in Administration Services • Add Essbase Servers in Administration Services

y m

e d a

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

Configuring Essbase

Embedded Java container

Server components

Administration Services database

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring Essbase

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

You perform the following tasks to configure Essbase components: • Register Essbase, Administration Services, and Provider Services with Shared Services • Register Essbase Server as a Windows service

• Configure the Administration Services and Essbase Studio database • Deploy Essbase, Administration Services, and Provider Services to application servers You can run these configuration tasks separately or all at one time.

e l c

EPM System Configurator configures the instance of Essbase that you selected on the Task Selection Panel. If you installed a second instance of Essbase Server, it appears as Essbase- on the Task Selection Panel.

a r O 7-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

During configuration, if you do not select “Deploy Essbase in Standalone mode,” EPM System Configurator automatically registers Essbase with Shared Services and writes the Shared Services connection information to the essbase.cfg file. In Windows, EPM System Configurator automatically sets environment variables. The Essbase installation location, known as ESSBASEPATH, is also set automatically as a user variable. NOTE: The Essbase installation location is stored in a variable. Previous versions of Essbase used ARBORPATH to refer to the installation location. ARBORPATH now refers to the application location.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

7-3

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

Configuring the Essbase Studio and Administration Services Database

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Configuring the Essbase Studio and Administration Services Database

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

The following table describes the fields that you must complete to configure a database for Essbase Studio and Administration Services: Field

Description

Database configuration for the following products

Confirm the list of products for which you want to configure the database. The list is determined by the products that you initially selected to configure. To create different databases for each product, select only one product at a time and run EPM System Configurator again to configure the database for another product.

• Use an already defined database

Select a previously configured database, or specify the name of a new database to configure.

• Create a new database

Note: This task assumes that you already created the database. It does not create the database.

Database Type

Select a database type from the list of supported types.

e l c

a r O 7-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

Field

Description

Server

Specify the name of the computer or server that is hosting the database.

Port

Select the default, or specify a custom server port number on which the database listens.

SID/Service Name

Specify the name of the database. If you are using an Oracle RAC database, specify the RAC service name.

Username

Enter the database user name.

Password

Enter the database user password.

Advanced Options (Optional)

Click to specify additional information, such as JDBC URL attributes and SSL information.

In this class, you use the same database tablespace for both Essbase Studio and Administration Services. If you want to use separate databases or tablespaces, run the configuration separately for Essbase Studio and Administration Services.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

7-5

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

Deploying Administration Services and Provider Services to the Application Server

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Deploying Administration Services and Provider Services to the Application Server

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Specify the application server options. The following table describes the options for a WebLogic application server deployment configuration: Field

Description

Ear/War Name

Select the components to deploy. Displays the server name.

Port

Accept the default port, or enter a port number that does not conflict with other applications installed on this machine.

e l c

a r O 7-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

Field

Description

SSL Port

Accept the default port or specify the SSL port to use for deployment. Specifying this port sets up SSL using the Java application server's default certificates. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide for recommendations on updating the Java application server with a valid certificate.

Set up

Click Set up to specify the logical address that the products use to connect to the Web application server. Perform this action when the Web applications do not communicate directly with the Web application server, as in the following scenarios: • You set up a cluster with a load balancer. • You used an SSL offloader.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

7-7

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

Configuring the Essbase Server

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring the Essbase Server

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You enter the information in the following table when configuring the Essbase Server: Field

Description

Essbase Instance Name

Enter a name for this instance of Essbase.

Agent Port Number

Accept the default port number on which the Essbase Server listens for client requests. If you change the default value, be sure to enter a port number that is not used by other programs. The port value is stored in essbase.cfg.

Start Port

e l c

Enter the first port number that Essbase Server tries to use to connect.

a r O 7-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

Field

Description

End Port

Enter the highest port number that Essbase Server can use to connect. Essbase uses at least two ports for each application. For a large number of applications, you need a larger port range.

Full path to application location

The file path for applications. Previous versions of Essbase used ARBORPATH to refer to the installation location. If you are upgrading from a previous release of Essbase, specify the same application location that you used in the previous release.

Set the language to be used by Essbase

The ESSLANG variable is a locale definition, including a code page specification that maps bit combinations to characters. For example, to support American English, set ESSLANG to English_UnitedStates.Latin1@Binary. Verify the operating system locale setting on your computer and select the matching ESSLANG value. The ESSLANG setting for a computer must agree with the locale setting of the computer’s operating system. You must select the correct ESSLANG setting for Essbase products to start successfully. The setting can affect the function of applications and databases.

y m

In Windows, if ESSLANG is already set on the computer (for example, if you are upgrading from a previous release), the current value is selected by default. Set the ARBORPATH environment variable

e d a

Specify whether you want EPM System Configurator to update the PATH and ARBORPATH environment variables.

c A

If you do not update the environment variables during configuration, you must update them manually.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Deploy Essbase in Standalone mode

e l c

Select to use legacy security for Essbase Server instead of Shared Services security. The configuration summary indicates that Essbase registration with Shared Services failed.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

7-9

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

Externalizing Users in Administration Services

Essbase Administration Console

Essbase local users

y m

Shared Services

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Externalizing Users in Administration Services

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

With Essbase, you provision with two levels of roles: Essbase Server roles and Essbase application roles. These roles are granted and managed through Shared Services Console. Provisioning information on Essbase application roles is stored in the Shared Services repository. In addition to roles, Essbase uses access control on dimension members, filters, and calculation scripts. Security filters may also be used to limit access. Access control information on Essbase artifacts is stored in the essbase.sec security file. Note the following externalization guidelines:

• The admin user of Administration Services is automatically externalized to Shared Services if Essbase is deployed in Shared Services mode using EPM System Configurator.

e l c

a r O

• If you convert a stand-alone Essbase instance to Shared Services mode, you must externalize the admin user from Administration Services. See Administration Services Online Help for instructions.

7-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

By default, Shared Services users can log on to Administration Services Console. The activities that users can perform in Administration Services Console and the Essbase Server are defined by the user's Essbase Server role assignments. If you deploy Essbase in Shared Services mode, the Shared Services admin user account is used initially to administer Essbase Server and applications.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

7-11

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

Adding Essbase Servers

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Adding Essbase Servers

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Connections to individual Essbase Servers are handled by the middle tier Essbase Administration Server. Before you can view application outlines in Administration Services Console, you must add Essbase Servers to Enterprise View. You can assign each user a different set of Essbase Servers and applications depending on their job function. To add Essbase Ser vers to Enterprise View: Perform one of the following actions:

• In Enterprise View, right-click Essbase Servers, and select Add Essbase Server.

e l c

• From the menu, select Actions, and then Add Essbase Server.

When you add Essbase Servers, you have the option to use single sign-on (SSO), which enables you to manage users through Shared Services.

a r O 7-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Configure Essbase • Externalize users in Administration Services • Add Essbase Servers in Administration Services

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

7-13

Lesson 7

Configuring Essbase

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 7-14

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

8

Configuring Planning

8

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Configure Planning • Manage Planning clusters

y m

e d a

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Lesson 8

Configuring Planning

Configuring Planning

Instances

RDBMS

Server components

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring Planning

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

You perform the following tasks to configure Planning: • Configure Product Options • Configure Database

• Deploy to Application Server • Manage Planning Clusters

The Manage Planning Clusters task is enabled after you complete the first three tasks.

e l c

a r O 8-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 8

Configuring Planning

Enabling Separately Licensed Product Options

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Enabling Separately Licensed Product Options

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

This step enables you to select products that you purchased. The available products depend on your purchase and licensing agreements. For the example on the slide, you can select the following products: • Capital Expenditures Planning

• Public Sector Planning and Budgeting • Workforce Planning

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

8-3

Lesson 8

Configuring Planning

Configuring the Planning System Database

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring the Planning System Database

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Specify the database settings to use for the products that you selected on the Task Selection Panel. For ease of deployment and simplicity, for a new installation, you can use one database for all products (the default when you configure all products at the same time). If you want to use a different database for each product, perform the Configure Database task separately for each product. Planning requires a system database and a separate database for each application that you create. You configure the Planning system database with EPM System Configurator. You configure databases used by applications in Planning or Performance Management Architect.

e l c

a r O 8-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 8

Configuring Planning

The following table describes the fields that you must complete to configure a database for Performance Management Architect: Field

Description

Database configuration for the following products

Confirm the list of products for which you want to configure the database. The list is determined by the products that you initially selected to configure. To create different databases for each product, select only one product at a time and run EPM System Configurator again to configure the database for another product.

• Use an already defined database

Select a previously configured database, or specify the name of a new database to configure.

• Create a new database

Note: This task assumes that you already created the database. It does not create the database.

Database Type

Select a database type from the list of supported types.

Server

Specify the name of the computer or server that is hosting the database.

Port

Select the default, or specify a custom server port number on which the database listens.

SID/Service Name

Specify the name of the database.

e d a

If you are using an Oracle RAC database, specify the RAC service name. Username

Enter the database user name.

Password

Enter the database user password.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Advanced Options (Optional)

e l c

y m

c A

Click to specify additional information, such as JDBC URL attributes and SSL information.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

8-5

Lesson 8

Configuring Planning

Deploying Planning to the Application Server

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Deploying Planning to the Application Server

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Specify the application server options. The following table describes the options for a WebLogic application server deployment configuration: Field

Description

Ear/War Name

Select the components to deploy. Displays the server name.

Port

Accept the default port, or enter a port number that does not conflict with other applications installed on this machine.

e l c

a r O 8-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 8

Configuring Planning

Field

Description

SSL Port

Accept the default port or specify the SSL port to use for deployment. Specifying this port sets up SSL using the Java application server's default certificates. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide for recommendations on updating the Java application server with a valid certificate.

Set up

Click Set up to specify the logical address that the products use to connect to the Web application server. Perform this action when the Web applications do not communicate directly with the Web application server, as in the following scenarios: • You set up a cluster with a load balancer. • You used an SSL offloader.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

8-7

Lesson 8

Configuring Planning

Managing Planning Clusters

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Managing Planning Clusters

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

A Planning cluster is a set of applications. Each cluster may contain one or more Planning applications. A default cluster is created after you complete all other Planning configuration tasks. You enter the information in the following table when managing Planning clusters: EPM System Configurator Fields

Description

Cluster Name

Specify a name for the cluster, or accept the default.

Web Tier Host Name

e l c

a r O 8-8

Enter the full name of the machine where you installed the Planning Web server component. In a multiserver environment, it should be the load balancer. In a single-server environment, it is the same as the Planning server.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 8 EPM System Configurator Fields

Configuring Planning

Description

Server Port

Accept the default server port or make a change, if necessary. The port number should be the port used for application server deployment.

SSL

Select to enable SSL.

Activate Cluster

Select if you want to display associate applications to a cluster. If you want to see all applications in Workspace, do not select this check box.

You edit, delete, and reassociate applications with a cluster with EPM System Configurator.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

8-9

Lesson 8

Configuring Planning

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Configure Planning • Manage Planning clusters

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 8-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

9

Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace

9

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Configure Financial Reporting and Web Analysis • Configure Workspace • Integrate products with Workspace

y m

e d a

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Lesson 9 Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace

Configuring Financial Reporting and Web Analysis

Client & Web browser

Server components

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

y m

e d a

c A

Configuring Financial Reporting and Web Analysis

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

You perform the following tasks to configure Reporting and Analysis: • Configure Database

• Configure Financial Reporting Server • Deploy to Application Server

Note the following considerations if you are installing Reporting and Analysis in a distributed environment: • Install only one instance of Reporting and Analysis Framework services and Interactive Reporting services on each host, and run EPM System Configurator on each machine. Then, you can replicate these services from the Administer section of Workspace (select Navigate then Administer, then Reporting and Analysis, and then Services) to replicate services on each host.

e l c

a r O 9-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 9

Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace

• If you are running multiple instances of the Reporting and Analysis Repository Service, all instances should share the file system location. Specify the file system location during configuration with EPM System Configurator, on the Configure RA Framework Services page, or from the Administer section of Workspace. If you are running this service as a Windows service, use a UNC path instead of a mapped drive to prevent potential permissions errors that can occur when Windows attempts to create a mapped drive at startup. • For the Financial Reporting Web application, you can have only one active instance of the Scheduler component in a clustered environment.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

9-3

Lesson 9 Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace

Configuring the Reporting and Analysis Database

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring the Reporting and Analysis Database

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Specify the database settings to use for the products that you selected on the Task Selection Panel. For ease of deployment and simplicity, for a new installation, you can use one database for all products (the default when you configure all products at the same time). If you want to use a different database for each product, perform the Configure Database task separately for each product.

e l c

a r O 9-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 9

Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace

The following table describes the fields that you must complete to configure a database for Reporting and Analysis: Field

Description

Database configuration for the following products

Confirm the list of products for which you want to configure the database. The list is determined by the products that you initially selected to configure. To create different databases for each product, select only one product at a time and run EPM System Configurator again to configure the database for another product.

• Use an already defined database

Select a previously configured database, or specify the name of a new database to configure.

• Create a new database

Note: This task assumes that you already created the database. It does not create the database.

Database Type

Select a database type from the list of supported types.

Server

Specify the name of the computer or server that is hosting the database.

Port

Select the default, or specify a custom server port number on which the database listens.

SID/Service Name

Specify the name of the database.

e d a

If you are using an Oracle RAC database, specify the RAC service name. Username

Enter the database user name.

Password

Enter the database user password.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Advanced Options (Optional)

e l c

y m

c A

Click to specify additional information, such as JDBC URL attributes and SSL information.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

9-5

Lesson 9 Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace

Configuring Reporting and Analysis Framework Services

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Configuring Reporting and Analysis Framework Services

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Specify the following Reporting and Analysis Framework service information: Field

Description

Repository Directory

Specify the directory where the Reporting and Analysis repository data is stored; for example: MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/ReportingAn alysis/data/directoryName. If you are replicating repositories, specify a write-able, shared drive. All instances should share the file system location.

e l c

Port Ranges

a r O 9-6

If you are running this service as a Windows service, use a UNC path instead of a mapped drive to prevent potential permissions errors that can occur when Windows attempts to create a mapped drive at startup. Specify the port range to use for Reporting and Analysis Framework services.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 9

Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace

Deploying Reporting and Analysis to the Application Server

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Deploying Reporting and Analysis to the Application Server

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Specify the application server options. The following table describes the options for a WebLogic application server deployment configuration: Field

Description

Ear/War Name

Select the components to deploy. Displays the server name.

Port

Accept the default port, or enter a port number that does not conflict with other applications installed on this machine.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

9-7

Lesson 9 Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace Field

Description

SSL Port

Accept the default port or specify the SSL port to use for deployment. Specifying this port sets up SSL using the Java application server's default certificates. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide for recommendations on updating the Java application server with a valid certificate.

Set up

Click Set up to specify the logical address the products use to connect to the Web application server. Select this option when the Web applications do not communicate with the Web application server directly, as in the following scenarios: • You set up a cluster with a load balancer. • You are using an SSL offloader.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 9-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 9

Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace

Configuring Workspace

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring Workspace

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

In this release, Workspace tasks are bundled in the Foundation Services tasks with Shared Services. However, if you install additional EPM System products after you configure the Foundation Services Web server, you must rerun the Foundation Services Web server configuration task to register the new products in Workspace.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

9-9

Lesson 9 Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace

Integrating Products with Workspace

Oracle BI EE

BI Publisher

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Integrating Products with Workspace

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You can integrate Oracle BI EE 10.1.3.4.x and BI Publisher 10.1.3.4.x with Workspace by updating the Shared Services Registry. To update the Shared Services Registry with information for Oracle BI EE and BI Publisher, perform the following tasks: 1. Back up the Shared Services Registry database.

2. Back up Foundation Services templates in MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/config/resources/integration.

e l c

a r O 9-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 9

Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace

3. Locate the following templates: • biee.xml (Oracle BI EE release 10.1.3.4.x)—Creates the Oracle BI EE component hierarchy and adds entries for one or more instances of the Oracle BI EE release Web application to the Shared Services Registry. • bip.xml (BI Publisher 10.1.3.4.x)—Creates the BI Publisher component hierarchy and adds entries for one or more instances of the Oracle BI Publisher Web application to the Shared Services Registry. 4. Open the templates in a text editor, and edit them according to the instructions included in the file. 5. On the machine on which you edited the templates, run the following epmsys_registry.bat command against both files that you edited. The command is located in MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/bin. epmsys_registry.bat createcomponenthierarchy bip.xml epmsys_registry.bat createcomponenthierarchy biee.xml 6. Launch EPM System Configurator and rerun the Foundation Services—Configure Web Server task.

y m

7. Restart services.

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

9-11

Lesson 9 Configuring Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Workspace

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Configure Financial Reporting and Web Analysis • Configure Workspace • Integrate products with Workspace

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 9-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

1 0

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

10

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Enumerate troubleshooting basics • Review hardware and software requirements • Check release compatibility • Identify port conflicts

y m

• Start and stop EPM System services • Run EPM System Diagnostics

e d a

• View and analyze log files • Troubleshoot product-specific issues • Contact Oracle Support

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

Troubleshooting Basics • •

Meeting hardware and software requirements Checking release compatibility

• • •

Identifying port conflicts Starting and stopping EPM System services Running EPM System Diagnostics

• • •

Viewing and analyzing log files Troubleshooting product-specific issues Contacting Oracle Support

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Troubleshooting Basics

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The succeeding topics provide troubleshooting tips for installing and configuring EPM System products. The following items are discussed: • Meeting hardware and software requirements • Checking release compatibility • Identifying port conflicts

• Starting and stopping EPM System services • Running EPM System Diagnostics • Viewing and analyzing log files

e l c

• Troubleshooting product-specific issues

a r O

• Contacting Oracle Support

10-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

Assumed knowledge of the following areas is required: • Security and server administration skills • Windows or UNIX administration skills • Web application server administration skills • A strong understanding of your organization's security infrastructure, including authentication providers such as Oracle Internet Directory, LDAP, or Microsoft Active Directory, and use of SSL • A strong understanding of your organization's database and server environments • A strong understanding of your organization's network environment and port usage

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

10-3

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

Reviewing Hardware and Software Requirements

Oracle Hyperion Planning and product components

Data sources

Third-party software

Web application and Web servers

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Reviewing Hardware and Software Requirements

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Prior to installing EPM System products, ensure that your environment meets the hardware and software requirements. Oracle recommends reviewing the following documents:

• Certification Matrix—lists supported platforms and software versions (http://www.oracle.com/technology/products/bi/hyperion-supported-platforms.html). • Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Start Here—contains information on prerequisites, default ports, and other information needed to plan a successful installation. • Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation and Configuration Readme—contains known installation or configuration issues for all EPM System products.

e l c

a r O 10-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

• Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation and Configuration Guide—provides step-by-step installation and configuration procedures for all EPM System products. For additional reference, review Lesson 2, “Preparing the Installation Environment” and Lesson 3, “Preparing the Software Requirements” in this student guide.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

10-5

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

Checking Release Compatibility Verify that all products installed are version 11.1.2.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Checking Release Compatibility

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The EPM System 11.1.2 product release is intended only for new deployments. Upgrading or migrating from previous EPM System releases is not supported. In addition, products from this release are not compatible with products and applications from previous releases. NOTE: Oracle will include the ability to upgrade from previous EPM System releases in a future EPM System product release.

e l c

a r O 10-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

Identifying Port Conflicts Ports used by EPM System products should be open.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Identifying Port Conflicts

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

During EPM System product configuration, default port numbers for Web applications are populated automatically. You can change the defaults during configuration, but each port number must be unique. Oracle recommends that you document the list of ports used during the installation and configuration. For a complete listing of EPM System ports, see “Default Ports” in Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Start Here.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

10-7

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

Starting and Stopping EPM Services

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Starting and Stopping EPM Services

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

By default, EPM System services are set to start automatically in a Windows environment, after configuration of EPM System products. For most environments, it is recommended to start services manually. You can automate the process by preparing batch files. For more information on startup dependencies, refer to lesson 11, “Accessing Planning in Workspace” and the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation and Configuration Guide. Before starting a service or process, you must verify that the preceding service or process started successfully. Some services or processes take longer than others to initialize, and startup times may vary by computer.

e l c

a r O 10-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

Running EPM System Diagnostics EPM System Diagnostics tests the status of installed and configured EPM System components, diagnoses problems, and assists in problem resolution.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Running EPM System Diagnostics

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The EPM System Diagnostics utility tests the connectivity of installed and configured EPM System products. Run EPM System Diagnostics on each machine in the deployment. The results of the tests are saved in HTML format. To run EPM System Diagnostics Select from the following actions:

• In Windows Explorer, navigate to MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/bin, and then double-click validate.bat. • From the Windows Start Menu, select Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Foundation Services, then epmsystem1, and EPM System Diagnostics.

e l c

• From a Unix console, change directory to MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/bin, and enter validate.sh.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

10-9

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

By default, the results are opened in a browser. Optionally, you can navigate to MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/diagnostics/reports and open validation_report_date_time.html. EPM System Diagnostics creates a ZIP file of the logs in MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/logszips.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 10-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

Viewing and Analyzing Log Files Log files are located in the diagnostics and cfgtoologs folders.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Viewing and Analyzing Log Files

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Most EPM System products use the Oracle Diagnostic Logging (ODL) framework for logging purposes. Aside from the EPM System Diagnostics logs, you can view productspecific log files for troubleshooting purposes. The following Oracle Hyperion EnterprisePerformance Management System Installer, Fusion Edition logs may be viewed from the MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/diagnostics/logs/install directory: • common-install.log—contains Common Component files activities • common-ocm-install.log—contains Oracle Configuration Manager (OCM) information • common-ohs-install.log—contains Oracle HTTP Web server (OHS) activity

e l c

• common-ohs-oui-out.log—contains Oracle Universal Installer information on the OHS installation

a r O

• common-product-install.log—contains product common component files activity; for example, ADM drivers, CRS utility

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

10-11

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

• common-staticcontent-install.log—contains static content information; for example, Help mostly, for each product on the Web server machine • common-wl-install.log—contains WebLogic file information • install-ocm-output.log—contains OCM file information • installTool-install-DDD-MM.DD.YYYY-TIME.log—contains EPM System Installer user activity • installTool-install-stderr.log and installTool-install-stdout.log—contains console normal and error output information • PRODUCT—install.log—indicates whether a product assembly installation fails; for example, hss-install.log for Shared Services The following EPM System Configurator logs are located in the MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/diagnostics/logs/config directory: • configtool.log—contains configuration task output and warning messages • registry.log—contains Registry calls made during configuration

y m

• cmcconfig.log—contains Reporting and Analysis Configuring and Monitoring console (CMC) calls made during configuration

e d a

• configtool_summary.log—contains a summary status of pass/fail tasks • ocm-config.log—contains OCM configuration information • SharedServices_Security.log—HSS registration log

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

The css.log containing CSS calls made during configuration is located under MIDDLEWARE_HOME/EPMSystem11R1/diagnostics/logs/css. Weblogic Application server logs are located under product-specific directory MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/diagnostics/logs/product/. Web Server logs created for OHS and EPM System Installer are located in MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/httpConfig/ohs/diagnostics/logs/OHS/ohs_compo nent. Start and stop logs are located in MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/diagnostics/logs/starter. Service startup logs are located in MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/diagnostics/logs/services.

e l c

a r O

Product logs are under subdirectories labeled with their product names in MIDDLEWARE_HOME/ user_projects/epmsystem1/ diagnostics/logs/.

10-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

Troubleshooting Product-Specific Issues

Shared Services

Workspace

Planning

Essbase

Performance Management Architect

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Troubleshooting Product-Specific Issues

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

This section covers product-specific issues for the following components: • Shared Services • Workspace • Essbase • Planning

• Performance Management Architect

Troubleshooting Shared Services

e l c

If you cannot access Shared Services Console, you can use the Registry Editor utility to modify the Shared Services user directory information, servers, or ports.

a r O

Be sure to back up the Shared Services registry prior to making any changes.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

10-13

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

When you configure EPM System products but EPM System Configurator cannot register them with Shared Services, perform the following tasks: • Add a CName record to the DNS for Shared Services on all EPM System product installation servers. • Add the alias to the host file on all EPM System product installation servers. If the Shared Services deployment to the Web or application server fails, you can rerun EPM System Configurator. If you install and configure products after configuring Foundation Services, you need to rerun the Configure Web Server task in the EPM System Configurator.

Troubleshooting Workspace If options are missing from Workspace, verify that you ran the Configure Web Server task for Foundation Services after configuring EPM System products.

Troubleshooting Essbase The following lists Essbase issues and possible solutions:

y m

• JVMMODULELOCATION has not been correctly set in essbase.cfg—modify the variable value in Administration Services.

e d a

• Fatal Error: Essbase is already loaded—error occurs when you are trying to start Essbase and an existing process is already running. Verify that all Essbase Server process instances are stopped before starting a new instance.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

• Failed in GCInit()—check ESSBASEPATH in hyperionenv.doc (UNIX) or setEssbaseEnv.cmd (Windows) to ensure that the local directory is correct and no files are missing from that directory. • Unable to connect client to server—use the PING command to ensure that the server is running. • Essbase startup is prevented because the default Essbase port is taken by other services (Windows)—preset a Windows registry key, HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Tcpip\Parameters, on the computer where Essbase runs. • Cannot log in Administration Services—ensure that the Essbase Server is running.

e l c

a r O 10-14

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

Troubleshooting Planning If you are unable to access Planning through Workspace, perform the following steps: 1. Test access to Workspace with this URL: http://Web Server:port/workspace/, where Web Server is the Web server machine host name and port is the Web server listen port; for example, http://myEPMserver:19000/workspace. 2. If step 1 does not work, verify that you have configured the Workspace proxy server plug-in. If it is configured, test whether you can access Planning directly; for example, http://myEPMServer:8300/HyperionPlanning/LogOn.jsp. Port 8300 is the default Planning deployment port. If you deployed Planning on a different port, ensure that you use that port in the URL. 3. If you can log on to Planning directly but still can not open Planning from Workspace, check the log file for the successful load of the Hyperion Planning module. If the log says the module could not be loaded, you must run EPM System Configurator and reregister Planning with Shared Services.

Troubleshooting Performance Management Architect The following lists Performance Management Architect issues and possible solutions:

y m

• Installation failure—ensure that Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 was not installed correctly. Install Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 and rerun the Performance Management Architect installation.

e d a

c A

• “No connection could be made because the target machine actively refused it” error message—ensure that the Dimension Server is running. If not, restart the Process Manager services, which starts Dimension Server and related services.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Unable to log on to Performance Management Architect—ensure that you are using ASP.NET 2.0.50727 and that ASP.NET and ASP pages are set to Allowed. To verify that .NET 2.0 is installed on a Windows 2003 machine: 1. Launch Internet Information Services Manager.

2. In the left pane, expand until Web Service Extensions is displayed. 3. Select Web Service Extensions.

4. In the right pane, verify that ASP.NET 2.0.50727 is listed and set to Allowed.

e l c

5. Perform one of the following actions:

a r O

a. If ASP.NET 2.0 is listed but not set to Allowed, click ASP.NET 2.0.50727 and click Allow.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

10-15

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

b. If ASP.NET 2.0 was not listed and you have .NET 2.0 installed, register .NET 2.0 with IIS: • From the command prompt, go to this directory: C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v2.0.50727 • Enter aspnet_regiis.exe —iru. • Repeat steps 1 to 5. NOTE: If you are using Oracle Database, make sure that you installed Oracle Data Provider for .NET 2.0 10.2.0.2.20 before configuring Performance Management Architect.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 10-16

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

Contacting Oracle Support

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Contacting Oracle Support

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

If you have a current support agreement and a customer support identifier, you can search the My Oracle Support knowledge base (http://support.oracle.com) for information about resolving installation and configuration issues. You can also use My Oracle Support for entering service requests, downloading software releases and patches, and other online support tasks.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

10-17

Lesson 10

Troubleshooting the EPM System Installation

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Enumerate troubleshooting basics • Review hardware and software requirements • Check release compatibility • Identify port conflicts • Start and stop EPM System services • Run EPM System Diagnostics

y m

• View and analyze log files

e d a

• Troubleshoot product-specific issues • Contact Oracle Support

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 10-18

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

1 1

Accessing Planning in Workspace

11

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • List the tasks for verifying the installation • Start EPM System services in the recommended order • Log on to Workspace • Create and deploy Planning applications

y m

• Provision users and groups • Configure Smart View

e d a

• Access Planning applications

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Verifying the Installation You verify the Planning installation by: • Starting required services • •

Creating and deploying applications Accessing Planning applications in Workspace, Smart View, and Administration Services

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Verifying the Installation

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You verify the Planning installation by performing the following tasks: • Starting required services

• Creating and deploying applications

• Accessing Planning applications in Workspace, Smart View, and Administration Services

e l c

a r O 11-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Starting Services

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Starting Services

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The first step in verifying your installation is to start the required services for the EPM System products in the following recommended sequence: 1. Databases

2. Oracle Process Manager

3. Foundation - Managed Server

4. Reporting and Analysis Framework 5. RMI Registry 6. Essbase

e l c

a. Essbase Server

a r O

b. Administration Services - Web Application c. Provider Services - Web Application

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-3

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace 7. Performance Management Architect a. EPM Architect - Process Manager b. EPMA Data Synchronizer - Web Application c. EPMA Web Tier - Web Application 8. CALC Manager - Web Application 9. Planning - Web Application 10. Reporting and Analysis a. Web Analysis- Web Application b. Financial Reporting - Web Application 11. Reporting and Analysis Framework - Web Application NOTE: Some of the services may not be required. For example, you only need to start EPMA Data Synchronizer - Web Application if you plan to perform data synchronizations.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 11-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Logging On to Workspace

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Logging On to Workspace

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

After starting the required services, you can access Workspace through the following URL: http://myEPMServer:19000/workspace

Where myEPMServer is the name of your EPM System host server. NOTE: Ensure that you are accessing Workspace through a supported browser.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-5

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Creating and Deploying Applications

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Creating and Deploying Applications

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Applications contain dimensions and dimension attributes designed to meet Planning needs, such as accounts, entities, scenarios, and other dimension elements. Planning may contain a selection of local dimensions or dimensions taken from Shared Library. You can create applications in Performance Management Architect and Classic Application Administration. The following table lists the types of application views: Type

Description

Generic

e l c

A template that enables you to create an application view without assigning a specific product. A generic application view displays properties for all products.

Planning

Planning application view

Consolidation

Financial Management application view

a r O 11-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace Type

Description

Profitability

Profitability Management application view

Essbase Analytics

Essbase application view

When you create applications with Performance Management Architect, your application views are stored in Application Library. NOTE: You must have the appropriate application creator role to be able to create applications. Both Performance Management Architect and Classic Application Administration enable you to create applications using Application Wizard. The wizard enables you to make the appropriate plan type and property selections. For example, you make the designation for plan types for Planning applications, but you would not select plan types for Financial Management applications. After creating the basic application structure using the wizard, you can add dimensions and further customize the application.

y m

Creating applications includes the following steps:

e d a

1. Plan for application plan types and properties. 2. Manage data sources.

c A

3. Run the wizard to set up the application name, plan types, and default currency.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

4. Add the application dimensions.

5. Activate dimension associations. 6. Choose performance settings. 7. Deploy the application.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-7

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Managing Data Sources In EPMA

In Classic Application Administration

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Managing Data Sources

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Before creating a Planning application, you must have relational databases available for storing metadata and other application settings. You create, edit, and delete Planning data sources in Performance Management Architect or Classic Application Administration. To create Planning data sources in Classic Application Administration: 1. From Workspace, select Navigate, then Administer, then Classic Application Administration, and then Planning Administration. 2. From the left pane, click Manage Data Source.

e l c

3. Click Create Data Source.

a r O

4. In the Data Source Name text box, enter a name.

11-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace 5. From Select Database Platform, select the database type for the Planning application database. 6. Enter the connection information for Application Database and Essbase Server settings. 7. Click Validate to validate the Application Database Connection and the Essbase Server Connection. 8. Click Finish. To create Planning data sources in Performance Management Architect: 1. From Workspace, select Navigate, then Administer, and then Application Library. 2. Select Tools, and then Manage Planning Data Source. 3. Select File, then New, and then DataSource. 4. In the Data Source Name text box, enter a name. 5. Optional: Enter a description.

y m

6. Click Next.

e d a

7. Enter the relational database details and click Test Connection. 8. If the connection verification returns successful, click Next.

c A

9. Enter the Essbase server connection details and click Test Connection.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

10. If the connection verification returns successful, click Next. 11. Click Finish.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-9

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Creating Applications in Performance Management Architect

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Creating Applications in Performance Management Architect

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Planning applications created with Performance Management Architect are referred to as Performance Management Architect Planning applications. Performance Management Architect Planning applications can share dimensions and members with each other. You use Application Creation Wizard to create a Planning application in Performance Management Architect. To create applications in Performance Management Architect: 1. In Workspace, select Navigate, then Administer, and then Application Library.

e l c

2. Select File, then New, and then Application. 3. In the Name text box, enter a name.

a r O 11-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace 4. From the Type drop-down list, select Planning. The page is refreshed with the required Planning application settings. 5. Select one of the following application types: • General • Public Sector Budgeting 6. Select a default currency. 7. Select whether to use multiple currencies. 8. For each plan type in the application, select the plan type and specify a plan name. 9. Select one of the following base period options to set how calendars roll up: • 12 Months: Four quarters per year; months roll up into parent quarters and quarters into years. • Quarters: Quarters roll up into years.

y m

• Custom: A custom time period, such as weeks or days. 10. Select the fiscal start month.

e d a

11. If you set the base time period as 12 Months, select a weekly distribution option: Even, 445, 454, or 544. 12. Click Next.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

13. Review and modify dimension selections, and click Next.

c A

14. Review the dimension nodes and application settings. 15. Click Validate.

16. Review any validation errors, and correct as needed. 17. Select Deploy when finished, and click Finish.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-11

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Creating Applications in Classic Application Administration

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Creating Applications in Classic Application Administration

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Classic Planning applications are stand-alone applications that do not share dimensions and members with other Planning applications. You use Classic Application Wizard to create and delete classic Planning applications. To create Planning data sources in Classic Application Administration: 1. From Workspace, select Navigate, then Administer, then Classic Application Administration, and then Planning Administration. 2. From the left pane, click Create Applications.

e l c

3. Select a data source.

4. In the Application text box, enter the application name.

a r O

5. Optional: In the Description text box, enter a description.

11-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace 6. Select a Shared Services project from the list. 7. From the Instance drop-down list, select a Planning cluster. 8. Select a calculation module, and click Next. 9. Select one of the following base period options to set how calendars roll up: • 12 Months: Four quarters per year; months roll up into parent quarters and quarters into years. • Quarters: Quarters roll up into years. • Custom: A custom time period, such as weeks or days. 10. Select the fiscal start year. 11. Select the fiscal start month. 12. If you set the base time period as 12 Months, select a weekly distribution option: Even, 445, 454, or 544. 13. Select the total years for the application, and click Next.

y m

14. Specify the default currency for entities in the application. 15. Select a multicurrency options:

e d a

• Select Yes for multicurrency applications. • Select No for single-currency applications. 16. Click Next.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

17. For each plan type in the application, select the plan type and specify a plan name. 18. Click Finish.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-13

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Creating Essbase Databases

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Creating Essbase Databases

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You create Essbase databases at the time of deployment or as a separate action. To create or refresh the Essbase outline at the time of deployment, you select the Create Outline or Refresh Outline option when you deploy the application. You can also create and refresh the Essbase outline within a Planning application by selecting Administration, then Application, and then Create Database or Refresh Database from the menu. An Essbase database is created for each plan type defined in a Planning application to store and calculate its data. You can store the following objects in an Essbase database: • Database outlines—Define the structure of the multidimensional database with dimensions and member hierarchies. The file extension is OTL.

e l c

• Calculation scripts—Perform custom calculations in addition to the standard consolidations and mathematical operations in the outline. The file extension is CSC.

a r O 11-14

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace • Report scripts—Define reports based on data in one or more databases. The file extension is REP. • Data load rules—Define editing operations on data files that populate the database. The file extension is RUL.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-15

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Provisioning Users and Groups

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Provisioning Users and Groups

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Each EPM System product is associated with a set of roles. After installing and configuring EPM System products, you provision users and groups with roles that relate to their job functions. You provision users and groups in Shared Services Console.

For a complete list of EPM System product roles, see Oracle Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide.

e l c

a r O 11-16

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Provisioning for Shared Services The following table describes Shared Services global roles: Role

Description

Administrator

Provides control over all products that integrate with Shared Services. This is the most powerful EPM System role and should, therefore, be assigned sparingly. Administrators can perform all administrative tasks in Shared Services Console and can provision themselves.

Shared Services Administrator role comprises these roles: • Create Integrations • Directory Manager • LCM Administrator • Manage Taskflows

This role grants broad access to all applications registered with Shared Services. The Administrator role is, by default, assigned to the admin Native Directory user, who is the only user available after you deploy Shared Services.

• Run Taskflows • Project Manager • Run Integrations Create Integrations

Creates Shared Services data integrations (the process of moving data between applications).

Directory Manager

Creates and manages users and groups within Native Directory.

y m

Because combining these roles allows Directory Managers to provision themselves, do not assign the Provisioning Manager role to Directory Managers.

e d a

Oracle recommends granting one user the Directory Manager role and another user the Provisioning Manager role. LCM Administrator

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

This role comprises these roles: • Directory Manager

• Manage Taskflows • Run Taskflows

c A

Runs Lifecycle Management to promote artifacts or data across product environments and operating systems. In addition to the Provisioning Manager role, the LCM Administrator role comprises Directory Manager and Project Manager roles of Shared Services.

• Project Manager

• Provisioning Manager Manage Taskflows

Creates, edits, views, schedules, and runs task flows for any EPM System product. Has full control over all task flows.

Run Taskflows

Views, schedules, and runs the task flows that users with the Manage Taskflows role created.

e l c

a r O

Cannot create or edit task flows for any EPM System product.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-17

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace Role

Description

Project Manager

Creates and manages Shared Services application groups.

Run Integrations

Views and runs Shared Services data integrations. For Performance Management Architect, executes data synchronizations.

Provisioning for Performance Management Architect The following table describes Performance Management Architect roles: Role

Description

EPMA Administrator

Creates and deploys Performance Management Architect applications. Application Creators own all dimensions in undeployed applications. They can create dimensions, but can change only the dimensions to which they have access permissions.

EPMA Administrator role comprises these roles: Application Creator • Essbase Application Creator • Financial Management Application Creator • Planning Application Creator • Profitability Application Creator Dimension Editor

Required, in addition to the Dimension Editor role, for Financial Management and Planning users to be able to navigate to their product’s Classic Application Administration options.

y m

When a user with the Application Creator role deploys an application from Performance Management Architect, that user automatically becomes the application administrator and provisioning manager for that application.

e d a

EPMA Administrators can also perform the following Transaction History Purge Utility operations:

c A

• Access all applications, even if the user did not deploy the application

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Manually mark a stalled job as timed out • View hidden jobs

• Open the application diagnostics screen to run tests and solutions on all applications

Dimension Editor

Creates, manages, and imports profiles to create dimensions. Creates and manages dimensions manually within Performance Management Architect. Required to access Classic Application Administration options for Financial Management and Planning using Web navigation.

e l c

a r O 11-18

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Provisioning for Calculation Manager The following table describes the Calculation Manager roles: Role

Description

Calculation Manager Administrator

Administers and manages Calculation Manager functions.

Calculation Manager Administrator role comprises these roles: • Financial Management Calculation Manager Administrator

Financial Management Calculation Manager Administrator administers Calculation Manager functions in Financial Management. Planning Calculation Manager Administrator administers Calculation Manager functions in Planning screens to run tests and solutions on all applications.

• Planning Calculation Manager Administrator

Provisioning for Essbase The following table describes the Essbase user roles:

y m

Role

Description

Administrator

Grants full access to administer the server, applications, and databases.

Application Manager

Creates, deletes, and modifies databases and application settings within the assigned application. Includes Database Manager permissions for the databases within the assigned application.

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Create/Delete Application

Creates and deletes applications and databases within applications. Includes Manager permissions for the applications and databases created by this user.

Database Manager

Manages the databases, database objects, locks, and sessions within the assigned application.

Provisioning Manager

Provisions users with the roles of this Essbase server.

Server Access

Accesses any database that has a default access other than none.

Calc

Calculates, updates, and reads data values based on the assigned scope, using assigned calculations and filters.

Start/Stop Application

Starts and stops applications or databases.

Write

Updates and reads data values based on the assigned scope, using assigned filters.

a r O

e l c

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-19

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace Role

Description

Read

Read data values.

Filter

Accesses specific data and metadata according to the restrictions of a filter.

Provider Services provides the Administrator power role, which enables users to create, modify, and delete Essbase Server clusters.

Provisioning Users for Planning Planning enforces two types of roles: • Planning global roles are used to provision users who create Planning applications using Performance Management Architect. Planning global roles include Dimension Editor and Planning Application Creator. • Planning application roles are used to provision users who access Planning applications. You can grant access to your Planning applications to any user or group in an authentication directory. When you grant a group access to an application, the users in the group are also granted access to the application.

y m

Provisioning for Planning Applications The following table describes the Planning application roles:

e d a

c A

Role

Description

Administrator

Performs all application tasks except those reserved for the Application Owner and Mass Allocate roles.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Creates and manages applications, manages access permissions, initiates the budget process, designates the e-mail server for notifications. Can use the Copy Data function.

Provisioning Manager Mass Allocation

Provisions users to the Planning application.

Accesses the Mass Allocate feature to spread data multidimensionally down a hierarchy, even to cells not visible in the data form and to which the user does not have access. Any user type can be assigned this role, but it should be assigned sparingly.

Analytic Services Write Access

e l c

a r O 11-20

For planners and interactive users: Grants users access to Planning data in Essbase equivalent to their Planning access permissions. Enables users who have write access to change Planning data directly in Essbase using another product such as Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting, Fusion Edition or a third-party tool.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace Role

Description

Planner

Enters and submits plans for approval and runs business rules and adapter processes. Uses reports that others created, views and uses task lists, enables e-mail notification for themselves, and creates data using Smart View.

Interactive User

Creates and maintains data forms, Smart View worksheets, business rules, task lists, Financial Reporting reports, and adapter processes. Manages the budget process. Can create smart slices in Smart View, use the Clear Cell Details function, and perform all Planner tasks. Interactive users are typically department heads and business unit managers.

View User

Views and analyzes data through Planning data forms and any data access tools for which they are licensed (for example, Financial Reporting, Oracle's Hyperion® Web Analysis, and Smart View). Typical View users are executives who want to see business plans during and at the end of the budget process.

Provisioning for Dimensions, Data Forms, and Task Lists Security for Planning artifacts such as Web forms and dimensions and members are maintained and defined within a Planning application.

y m

Within your Planning application, you can assign access rights for users and groups to the following application elements:

e d a

• Object Security—You can assign security to specific objects, such as data forms and task lists. For example, you can allow all users to access the standard expenses data form, but allow only payroll managers to use the salary expense data form.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

• Data Security—With data security, you can protect data and prevent unauthorized users from changing data. For example, you can restrict access to certain data elements in an application. • Task Security—Task security determines the tasks in an application that a user can access. You assign task security by assigning a role to a user. Each role is associated with a set of tasks. For example, interactive users cannot change dimension members, so the dimension-change option is not available to interactive members. After establishing or updating user and group security and assigning member access, you must refresh the Planning application to update to the Essbase security filters.

e l c

Planning artifacts are stored in the Planning relational repository.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-21

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace Provisioning for Offline Planning You can use Offline Planning to work with data forms offline and to synchronize information back to the Planning server when you are reconnected. You assign the Offline User role to users and groups to enable Offline Planning privileges.

Provisioning for Reporting and Analysis In addition to global roles, access preferences can be specified on Reporting and Analysis artifacts such as folders and documents (for example, reports, charts, and dashboards). Usually, access privileges on these artifacts are assigned to groups of users. The following table describes the Reporting and Analysis power roles: Role

Description

Reporting and Analysis Administrator

Conditionally accesses all resources (unless the file is locked by “no access”), but not all functionality; accesses the Administer and Impact Manager modules.

Reporting and Analysis Global Administrator

Universally and implicitly accesses all resources and functionality; accesses the Administer and Impact Manager modules.

y m

Note: Reporting and Analysis Global Administrators can never be denied access.

e d a

Content Manager

Manages imported repository content and execute tasks, with implicit access to all resources (unless the file is locked by “no access”); contains the Data Source Publisher role.

Data Source Publisher

Imports data source connectivity files. Applies to Interactive Reporting and Web Analysis.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Favorites Distributor

Pushes content to users’ Favorites folders through the Favorites Manager. Applies to Financial Reporting, Interactive Reporting, SQR Production Reporting, and Web Analysis.

Schedule Manager

Creates and manages events, calendars, time events, public parameters, and physical resources; creates batches; contains the Scheduler and Job Manager roles.

Provisioning Manager

Provisions Reporting and Analysis users.

The following table describes the Reporting and Analysis interactive roles: Role

e l c

Analyst

ra

Content Publisher

O

11-22

Description

Accesses interactive content using full analytic and reporting functionality. Imports, saves, and modifies batches, books, reports, and documents; creates and modify shortcuts and folders.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace Role

Description

Data Editor

Pushes Web Analysis data to Essbase.

Report Designer

Accesses authoring studios to create and distribute documents. Applies to Financial Reporting and Web Analysis.

Scheduler

Schedules jobs and batches using the Schedule module; navigates the repository and assigns access control; contains the Explorer and Job Runner roles. Applies to Financial Reporting, Interactive Reporting, and SQR Production Reporting.

The following table describes the Reporting and Analysis view roles: Role

Description

Explorer

Lists repository content in the Explore module and in context using the Open dialog box; searches, views, and subscribes to content.

Personal Parameter Editor

Defines points of view and personal parameters on database connections to customize query result sets. Applies to Interactive Reporting, SQR Production Reporting, and Web Analysis.

Viewer

Reviews Workspace content. The content is static and accessible only from the Favorites folder. Applies to Financial Reporting, Interactive Reporting, Production Reporting, and Web Analysis.

y m

Note: This role provides minimal end-user functionality; use it only when no other role assignments are possible.

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-23

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Configuring Smart View

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring Smart View

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

When you use data forms with Smart View, you have the same functionality as you have with data forms in Planning. You can view form instructions, adjust data, manipulate data with ad hoc adjustments, lock and spread values to base periods, enter supporting detail and cell text, and launch business rules. The Planning server performs validity checks involving user security, metadata access, and form definition changes in order to synchronize data. The server then saves only incremental changes to the cells that were changed or modified after the data form was opened in Excel.

e l c

a r O 11-24

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Installing Smart View from Workspace You install Smart View from Workspace.To install Smart View from Workspace: 1. In Workspace, select Tools, then Install, and then Smart View. 2. Follow the steps in the installation wizard.

Accessing the Smart View Panel Smart View is designed to work optimally with the ribbon structure in Microsoft Office 2007. However, you can use Smart View with Office 2003 through the Smart View menu. You manage data source connections, access data and task lists, create reports, and open Crystal Ball workbooks (if you are licensed for Crystal Ball EPM) in the Smart View panel. To open the Smart View panel: 1. In Excel, select the Smart View ribbon. 2. Click Open, and select Smart View Panel. The Smart View panel s displayed on the right side of the Microsoft Office application.

y m

e d a

You can move, resize, or close the Smart View panel from the down arrow in the title bar. The Smart View panel contains the following panes:

c A

• Home—displays links to Shared Connections and Private Connections, and a list of recently used items such as ad hoc grids, data forms, and tasks.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Shared Connections—contains a drop-down list of available connections from Shared Services and a view of the contents of the currently selected connection. • Private Connections—contains a drop-down list of available connections saved on the local computer and a view of the contents of the currently selected connection. You can also enter a URL to connect directly to a data source. • Task Lists—contains a list of tasks. This pane opens only when you select a task list from Shared Connections or Private Connections. • Simulation Workbook—available to licensed Crystal Ball EPM users. This pane contains a list of available Crystal Ball EPM workbooks that you can open in Smart View.

e l c

a r O

• Action Panel—contains a list of operations available based on the selection in the Shared Connection pane.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-25

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Types of Connections Before you can access data using Smart View, you must establish connections to your Planning applications. You connect to data sources, manage your connections, and open grids, data forms, and task lists from the Smart View Panel. Depending on how you configure Smart View, you may or may not require users to enter login credentials to connect to data sources. There are two types of connections: Shared Connections and Private Connections. Shared Connections Shared connections are stored in a central location and are available to multiple users through the Smart View panel. They are created and maintained by administrators. Users, unlike administrators, cannot add, edit, or rename shared connections. They can save them as private connections. Private Connections Private connections are created by saving a shared connection to your local computer or by entering a URL to a provider that was not configured for shared connections.

y m

Connecting to Data Sources

e d a

You connect to data sources in the Smart View Panel.

c A

To connect to data sources and open items in Smart View: 1. From the Smart View panel, perform one of the following actions:

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Click an item under Recently Used. You can click to pin items to this list. • Click Shared Connections to open the Shared Connections Panel, where you can select a connection from the drop-down menu. You are prompted for your user name and password. • Click Private Connections to open the Private Connections Panel, where you can select a connection from the drop-down menu. You are prompted for your user name and password when you select a connection. • Click Private Connections. Enter a URL in the box, and press Enter. 2. From the list, double-click the item (data form, ad hoc grid, smart slice, or task list) that you want to open.

e l c

a r O 11-26

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Accessing Planning Applications You can access Planning applications in: • Workspace • •

Smart View Administration Services

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Accessing Planning Applications

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You can access Planning applications in: • Workspace • Smart View

• Administration Services

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-27

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Accessing Planning Applications in Workspace

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Accessing Planning Applications in Workspace

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

After deploying your application, you launch Workspace to perform the following tasks: • Build and manage applications

• Execute planning application tasks

• Perform consolidation application tasks

• Run or view highly formatted financial and operational reports from most data sources, including Planning and Financial Management • Conduct high-performance, multidimensional modeling, analysis, and reporting with Essbase

e l c

• Using Interactive Reporting, generate ad hoc relational queries, self-service reporting, and dashboards against ODBC data sources

a r O

• Run high-volume, enterprise-wide reporting for production reporting

11-28

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace • Using Web Analysis, perform interactive ad hoc analysis, presentations, and reporting of multidimensional data • Generate enterprise metrics for management metrics and analysis, and present information in easy-to-use, personalized, interactive dynamic dashboards In addition, Workspace provides access to and interaction with other published content, such as Word or Excel documents. Access to Workspace menus and toolbar features are based on the user’s assigned roles and provisioned modules. To access Planning applications in Workspace: 1. Select Navigate, then Applications, and then Planning. 2. Select the application that you want to open. 3. Optional: Select File, and then Preferences to make the application that is currently open the default application. When you log on, the default application is opened automatically.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-29

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Accessing Planning Applications in Smart View

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Accessing Planning Applications in Smart View

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

In Smart View, you can view, import, manipulate, distribute and share data from data sources. To access Planning applications in Smart View:

1. In Excel, select the Smart View ribbon, and open the Smart View panel. 2. Click Shared Connections. 3. Click Modify.

The Advanced tab in the Options dialog box is displayed.

e l c

4. Enter the Shared Connections URL using the following syntax, and click OK:

a r O

http://myEPMServer:19000/workspace/SmartViewProviders

5. From the Shared Connections drop-down list, select a connection and click the right arrow.

11-30

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Taking Forms Offline

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Taking Forms Offline

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You use the Take Offline Wizard to take data forms offline. To take forms offline:

1. In the Smart View ribbon, click More, select Offline, and then Take Offline. 2. Select the data forms that you want to take offline, and click Next. 3. Make your modifications to the data form.

4. In the Selected Members column, enter the required dimension members and click Next.

e l c

5. In the Local Connection Name text box, enter a name. 6. Optional: Enter a description.

a r O

7. Click Finish.

8. When the Take Offline Wizard completes, click Done.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-31

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace To work with forms offline: 1. In the Smart View panel, click Private Connections. 2. From the drop-down list, select your offline connection. 3. Expand the list until you locate your data form. 4. Double-click the data form name. 5. Make your modifications. 6. If not already selected, click the Planning ribbon. 7. Click Submit Data.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 11-32

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Accessing Planning Outlines in Administration Services

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Accessing Planning Outlines in Administration Services

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

An Essbase database is created for each plan type defined in a Planning application to store and calculate its data. You can store the following objects in an Essbase database: • Database outlines—Define the structure of the multidimensional database consisting of dimensions and member hierarchies. The file extension is OTL. • Calculation scripts—Enable you to perform custom calculations in addition to the standard consolidations and the standard mathematical operations defined in the database outline. The file extension is CSC. • Report scripts—Define reports based on data in one or more databases. The file extension is REP.

e l c

• Data load rules—Define editing operations on data files that populate the database. The file extension is RUL.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-33

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace After deploying Planning applications, you can perform the following tasks in Essbase Administration Services Console: • View the database outline • Add formulas to members in the outline • Create load rules for loading data • Load data into databases • Calculate databases (aggregate data) • View log reports and other database server information for troubleshooting To access Planning applications in Administration Ser vices Console: 1. In Enterprise View, expand Essbase Servers. 2. Expand your EPM Web server, and then Applications. 3. Locate the application that you want to view, and click Expand. The plan types are displayed.

y m

4. Expand a plan types to display the following nodes:

e d a

• Outline • Linked Reporting Objects • Calculation Scripts

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Rules Files • Partitions

e l c

c A

a r O 11-34

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • List the tasks for verifying the installation • Start EPM System services in the recommended order • Log on to Workspace • Create and deploy Planning applications • Provision users and groups • Configure Smart View

y m

• Access Planning applications

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

11-35

Lesson 11 Accessing Planning in Workspace

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 11-36

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

1 2

Verifying the Reporting Installation

12

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Test the Financial Reporting connectivity with Planning • Test the Web Analysis connectivity with Planning

y m

e d a

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Lesson 12

Verifying the Reporting Installation

Testing Financial Reporting Connectivity

You use Financial Reporting Studio to create reports.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Testing Financial Reporting Connectivity

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You can preview reports in two formats:

• Hypertext Markup Language (HTML)—Preview reports or snapshots • Portable Document Format (PDF)—Preview or print reports or snapshots that are displayed in the Web browser in Adobe Acrobat Reader Essbase Server must be started so that you can view dynamic reports. When you view a dynamic report, the user point of view (POV) is displayed. When you change the user POV, the report is automatically refreshed to display current data for the new member selection. When you view a snapshot report, you see data for a specific point in time. Because the POV is fixed with static data when it is created, the user POV is not displayed when you view it. A snapshot report is disconnected from the data source and is not updated when data changes.

e l c

a r O 12-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 12

Verifying the Reporting Installation

To preview reports: 1. In the Workspace repository, right-click a report or snapshot. 2. Select Open In. 3. Select HTML Preview or PDF Preview. The report is displayed in the content area. To create a report: 1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Reporting and Analysis, and then Financial Reporting Studio. Financial Reporting Studio is displayed. 2. Select File, then New, and then Report. An empty report workspace is displayed. 3. Select Insert, and then Grid. 4. In the report workspace, drag the crosshairs to draw the grid size. The Select a Database Connection dialog box is displayed.

e d a

5. In the Database Connection list, select a database connection. 6. Click OK.

y m

c A

7. In the Point of View frame, drag dimensions to the Rows and Columns areas and click OK.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

8. In the grid, double-click a dimension.

The Select Members dialog box is displayed. 9. Select the members to display and click OK.

10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 to select members for dimensions displayed in the report. 11. If you added dimensions to the POV, click a dimension on the POV bar above the grid. The Select Members dialog box is displayed.

12. Select a member for each dimension in the Point of View.

e l c

13. Click OK.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

12-3

Lesson 12

Verifying the Reporting Installation

14. Select File, and then Save. The Save Report dialog box is displayed. 15. In the Name text box, type a name for the report. 16. Click Save. 17. Select File, and then Web Preview. The report is displayed in Workspace. 18. In Financial Reporting Studio, select File, and then Exit.

Importing Content You can import Financial Reporting files that are exported from a repository. This process is useful for moving repository objects from one server to another. The following Financial Reporting file types can be imported: FIle Type

Extension

Report

DES

Snapshot report

RPT

Book

KBK

Snapshot book

KBT

Batch

BCH

Grid

ROG

Text or object Image

y m

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I ROT

c A

ROI

Chart

ROC

Row and column template

ROS

You can also import zipped files that contain Financial Reporting folders and files. The folder paths and files are created during import. After importing a Financial Reporting file, you modify it to configure general and advanced properties and to assign access privileges.

e l c

a r O 12-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 12

Verifying the Reporting Installation

When you import a file into a repository, Financial Reporting verifies whether the database connections specified in the file exist in the repository. The following actions occur during import: • If the imported file contains a database connection that matches a connection in the repository, the file is imported with the matching database connection. • If the imported file does not contain a database connection that matches a connection in the repository, you are prompted to select or create a database connection.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

12-5

Lesson 12

Verifying the Reporting Installation

Managing Financial Reporting Database Connections

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Managing Financial Reporting Database Connections

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Database connections define the data sources for the grids of Financial Reporting files. For repository files, you can create, edit, delete, and change database connections. This ability enables you to reassign database connections, when you move items from one server to another, and to point repository files to a various servers and applications. In Database Connection Manager, you manage database connections and, for each connection, provide the following information: • Database connection name

• Data source type—Essbase, Financial Management, Planning, SAPBW, or MS OLAP

e l c

• Connection path

a r O

• Authentication information

12-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 12

Verifying the Reporting Installation

To add database connections: 1. Select Tools, then Database Connection Manager. The Database Connection Manager dialog box is displayed with a list of database connections. 2. Click New. The Database Connection Properties dialog box is displayed. 3. In the Database Connection Name text box, enter a unique database connection name. 4. From the Type drop-down list, select a data source type. 5. For the data source type, enter the required information and click OK. The new database connection is displayed in the Database Connection Manager dialog box. 6. Click Close.

Exporting Reports to Excel

y m

After previewing a report in HTML or PDF, you can export the report to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

e d a

When you export a report to Excel, you select one of the following options:

c A

• Fully Formatted Grids and Text—The current page of the report is exported to Excel in a format that is similar to its format in Financial Reporting. The report is converted to HTML with the Hyperion formatting definitions and calculated numbers. Charts in the report are exported as images. To export multiple pages, you display and export one page at a time.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Query-Ready Grids and Text—The first grid in the report is exported to Excel. The grid is converted to HTML, and Hyperion-specific formatting is removed. Images and charts in the report are not exported. After the grid is exported, you connect to an Essbase server and use Smart View to perform ad hoc analysis.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

12-7

Lesson 12

Verifying the Reporting Installation

Testing Web Analysis Connectivity You launch Web Analysis Studio from the Links menu in Workspace.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Testing Web Analysis Connectivity

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You can preview Web Analysis documents in HTML or Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) from Workspace. PDF printing options:

• Print Screen—Prints the current display quickly and easily. Because documents can contain multiple data objects, Print Screen does not specify OLAP pages. If you want to include OLAP pages or object-specific document summaries, you should select Print Selected Object. • Print Selected Object—Prints the selected document and its specified OLAP pages. To test Web Analysis, you first launch Web Analysis Studio and create a database connection to a Planning application. You then create a Web Analysis report and view the report in Workspace.

e l c

a r O 12-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 12

Verifying the Reporting Installation

To create a database connection: 1. In Workspace, select Tools, then Links, and then Web Analysis Studio. 2. When prompted, select to install the required Web Analysis components, accepting all defaults. Web Analysis Studio is displayed. 3. Select File, then New, then Database Connection, and then Planning. 4. Enter the requested information (name of the application server, administrator user ID, and password), and click Next. 5. In the Available Applications list, select the Planning application that you created. 6. Click Finish. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 7. In the File Name text box, type a name for the database connection. 8. Click OK.

y m

To create a report:

e d a

1. In the view pane, double-click Databases. A list of database connections is displayed. 2. Double-click the database connection that you created. 3. In the toolbar, click Navigate Data Source.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

4. Drag dimensions to the Rows, Columns, and Filters sections. 5. From the list of accounts, select the accounts that you want in the report and click OK. 6. For each dimension in the Filters section, select the member that you want for the filter and click OK. The report is displayed. 7. Select File, and then Save.

8. In the File Name text box, type a name for the report and click OK. 9. Select File, and then Exit.

e l c

a r O

Workspace is displayed.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

12-9

Lesson 12

Verifying the Reporting Installation

10. In the view pane, select Users. A list of users is displayed. 11. Select the Planning administrator user. 12. Select Reports. The report that you created is displayed in the list of reports. 13. Select the report that you created. The report is displayed in Workspace.

Using POV Definitions in Workspace You cannot create or activate POV definitions in Workspace. However, you can select database connections with activated POV definitions and apply the definitions to documents that you are creating. Workspace users cannot apply POV definitions to documents.

Managing Web Analysis Database Connections

y m

You must use Web Analysis Studio, not Web Analysis, to create and modify database connections. Documents are dependent on database connection files to query data sources. A document can use multiple database connections to connect to one or more data sources.

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 12-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 12

Verifying the Reporting Installation

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Test the Financial Reporting connectivity with Planning • Test the Web Analysis connectivity with Planning

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

12-11

Lesson 12

Verifying the Reporting Installation

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 12-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

1 3

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

13

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Describe Application Upgrade Wizard • Move Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

y m

e d a

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Lesson 13

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

Application Upgrade Wizard Application Upgrade Wizard enables upgrades from Classic applications to Performance Management Architect.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Application Upgrade Wizard

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You use the Application Upgrade Wizard to move Classic applications to Performance Management Architect. If you move an application created in Classic Application Administration to Performance Management Architect, an application cannot return to Classic Application Administration.

e l c

a r O 13-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 13

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect To access the Application Upgrade Wizard: In EPM Workspace, select Navigate, then Administer, and then Application Upgrade.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

To access Application Upgrade Wizard in Workspace, select Navigate, then Administer, and then Application Upgrade. The succeeding sections cover the individual pages in the wizard.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

13-3

Lesson 13

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

Step 1: Reviewing the Welcome Page

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Step 1: Reviewing the Welcome Page

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Upon accessing Application Upgrade Wizard, the Welcome page is displayed with the following content: The following screens will allow you to select the application(s) and then perform the upgrade on those applications. you may select as many applications as you wish to upgrade at one time. The Upgrade Wizard may be run at any time but on only those applications that have not been upgraded. When you finish reviewing the Welcome page, click Next.

e l c

a r O 13-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 13

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

Step 2: Reviewing the Application Summary

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Step 2: Reviewing the Application Summary

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The second page of the Application Upgrade Wizard, Application Summary, displays the applications found in your EPM System installation. It indicates which applications can and cannot be upgraded. In the Comment column, it states why the application cannot be upgraded. After reviewing the application list, click Next.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

13-5

Lesson 13

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

Step 3: Selecting Applications

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Step 3: Selecting Applications

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

On the Application Selection page, you select from the list of upgradeable applications and move them to the Application to Upgrade list. After making your selections, click Next.

e l c

a r O 13-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 13

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

Step 4: Reviewing the Upgrade Summary

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Step 4: Reviewing the Upgrade Summary

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The Upgrade Summary page displays the list of applications to be upgraded. When you click Finish, the upgrade process begins.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

13-7

Lesson 13

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

Step 5: Viewing Job Console

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Step 5: Viewing Job Console

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

When the upgrade process begins, Job Console is displayed. Click Refresh to update the job status on the page.

e l c

a r O 13-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 13

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

Step 6: Viewing Application Library

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Step 6: Viewing Application Library

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

After the upgrade process is completed, navigate to Application Library to verify that the application moved to Performance Management Architect. Select the application and review the information in the Summary and Properties sections.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

13-9

Lesson 13

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

Step 7: Accessing the Application

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Step 7: Accessing the Application

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Once verified that the application moved to Performance Management Architect, you can access the application from the Navigate menu. To access applications, select Navigate, then Applications, then Consolidation, and then select the application.

e l c

a r O 13-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 13

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Describe Application Upgrade Wizard • Move Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

13-11

Lesson 13

Moving Classic Applications to Performance Management Architect

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 13-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

1 4

Performing System Maintenance

14

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Describe the backup and recovery process • Backup repositories, databases, and file systems • Backup the Windows registry • Backup and recover EPM System products

y m

• Manage EPM System log files

e d a

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Backup and Recovery Overview • •

Databases, applications, and application data File system - product directories and application directories

• •

Operating system registry Product-specific components

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Backup and Recovery Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

System failures can devastate businesses, resulting in lost data, time and revenue, and creating user dissatisfaction. Whether you use one database or multiple databases storing terabytes of data, Oracle recommends that you protect yourself from significant losses in data, time, and resources by developing and implementing a backup and recovery plan.

Assumed Knowledge

This course is for administrators who install, configure, deploy, and manage EPMSystem products. The following skills are required: • Security and server administration skills

e l c

• Windows or UNIX administration skills or both, depending on your computing environment

a r O 14-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

• Web application server administration skills, including familiarity with your Java application server • A strong understanding of your organization's security infrastructure, including authentication providers such as Oracle Internet Directory, Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP), Microsoft Active Directory, and use of Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) • A strong understanding of your organization's database and server environments, including file systems • A strong understanding of your organization's network environment and port usage

Common Backup Tasks You should back up the following types of events: • Before refreshing applications • Before moving applications to another server • Before upgrading applications

y m

• As your business dictates (for example, at key planning milestones)

e d a

The following list summarizes common backup tasks: • Preparing for backup—Stop products and related services.

c A

• Database backup—Back up all relational storage used by EPM System products. • File system backup—Regular file system backups are recommended for Foundation Services, Business Rules, FDM, Financial Management, Performance Management Architect, Planning, and Reporting and Analysis.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Operating System registry backup—Back up up registry settings and specific system variables in Windows and UNIX environments. • Product-specific backup—Back up specific EPM System product components such as application metadata and data.

Backup Prerequisites

Perform these tasks before backing up:

e l c

• Stop products and ensure that all users are logged off. • Stop all product services.

a r O

• Stop all Workspace services.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

14-3

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Backing Up Databases and File Systems Regular backups of the following product databases and file systems are recommended:  Foundation Services  Business Rules  Performance Management Architect  Calculation Manager  Financial Management  Essbase  Planning  Hyperion Reporting and Analysis

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Backing Up Databases and File Systems

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Many EPM System products use repositories, which contain various items that the products require. Repository contents differ by product. Some product repositories use RDBMS, some use file systems, and some use both RDBMS and file systems. Regular backups of the following product databases and file systems are recommended: • Foundation Services

• Business Rules and Calculation Manager • Performance Management Architect • Essbase

e l c

• Planning

a r O

• Reporting and Analysis

14-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Database Backup Types You can use several types of database backup, depending on your computing environment. Physical Backup Physical backups are copies of physical database files. For example, a physical backup might copy database content from a local disk drive to another secure location. A physical backup can be hot or cold: • Hot backup—Users can modify the database during a hot backup. Log files of changes made during the backup are saved, and the logged changes are applied to synchronize the database and the backup copy. You perform a hot backup when a full backup is needed and the service level does not allow system downtime for a cold backup. • Cold backup—Users cannot modify the database during a cold backup, so the database and the backup copy are always synchronized. You perform a cold backup only when the service level allows for the required system downtime. You can perform a full or incremental backup:

y m

• Full—Creates a copy of data that can include parts of a database such as the control file, transaction files (redo logs), archive files, and data files. This backup type protects data from application error and safeguards against loss by providing a way to restore original data. Perform this backup weekly, or biweekly, depending on how often your data changes. Oracle recommends that you make full backups cold, so that users cannot make changes during backup.

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

NOTE: The database must be in archive log mode for a full physical backup. • Incremental—Captures only changes made after the last full physical backup. The files differfor databases, but the principle is that only transaction log files created since the last backup are archived. You can perform an incremental backup hot, while the database is in use, but it slows database performance. In addition to backups, consider using clustering or log shipping to secure database content. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System High Availability Guide and the RDBMS documentation.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

14-5

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Logical Backups A logical backup copies data, but not physical files, from one location to another. A logical backup is used to move or archive a database, tables, or schemas and to verify database structures. A full logical backup enables you to copy these items across environments that use different components, such as operating systems: • Entire applications • Data repositories such as the Shared Services Registry and Oracle Essbase cubes • Individual artifacts such as scripts, data forms, and rule files A logical export backup generates necessary Structured Query Language (SQL) statements to obtain all table data that is written to a binary file. A logical export backup does not contain database instance-related information, such as the physical disk location, so you can restore the same data on another database machine. Periodic logical export backups (at least weekly) are recommended in case physical backups fail or the database machine becomes unavailable. Backup with Lifecycle Management You can use Lifecycle Management, which is provided with Shared Services, to perform logical backups. Lifecycle Management is discussed in the succeeding lesson.

y m

e d a

File System Backup Types

A complete file system backup includes an entire system directory. For example, backing up the EPM Oracle home directory backs up all installed EPM System products.

c A

The following table describes the types and frequencies of file system backups that you can perform: Type

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I Description

Post-installation Daily Incremental Weekly-full As-needed

e l c

Backs up directories created or modified if you reconfigure products. Backs up new directories or files or those modified since the previous day, including repository content and log files. Backs up all files in the directories for which you perform incremental backups on a daily basis. Backs up data that is not frequently modified.

You back up directories and files by copying them to another location or storage device. You can also use utilities provided with your operating system, such as the Windows 2003 Backup Utility. In the event of a failure, restore these directories and files by returning the copy to the original location.

a r O 14-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Oracle recommends that you back up the following files: • MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/config (to back up the configuration and reconfiguration settings written to the Shared Services Registry) • MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/product • MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/domains/EPMSystem (to backup the EPM System WebLogic domain directory) • MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/import_export (to backup Lifecycle Management content) • Product applications and application data using Lifecycle Management.

Recovery Sequence Restore Shared Services, and the components that you backed up for Shared Services, before restoring other products. NOTE: It is imperative that you synchronize the backup and restore operations for EPM System products, because EPM System products continually read and write information to the Shared Services repository. When restoring Shared Services from a backup, for example, you must also restore registered EPM System products from backups that were made at the same time.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

14-7

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Backing Up Windows Registry Settings

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Backing Up Windows Registry Settings

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Oracle recommends that you back up the Windows registry, including installation and configuration entries such as HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\HyperionSolutions. You can back up system and product components (such as services) by using the regedit command in Microsoft Windows to create a registry file. To export Windows registr y settings: 1. Select Start, and then Run.

2. Enter regedit, and click OK.

3. Right-click a component, and select Export.

e l c

4. Provide a name and location for the registry file; for example, PlanningServer.reg.

a r O

5. Run the file to restore the component in the event of a failure.

Oracle recommends backing up the HYPERION_HOME and EPM_ORACLE_HOME system variables as well.

14-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Backing Up and Recovering EPM System Products

Planning

Shared Services

Workspace

Essbase

Performance Management Architect

Smart View

y m

Calculation Manager

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Backing Up and Recovering EPM System Products

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

This section discusses product-specific backup practices.

Workspace and Shared Services

Workspace and Shared Services share a file system and database. NOTE: You must synchronize Shared Services backups with product backups to preserve provisioning data.

e l c

Backing Up the File System You can also use utilities provided with your operating system to backup folders to a different location.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

14-9

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

To back up the file system for Workspace and Shared Ser vices: 1. Copy the MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1 folder to a storage device or another network location after you install or reconfigure Workspace. NOTE: This is a one-time backup of all EPM System products that are installed and configured on the machine. 2. Perform a weekly full or daily incremental backup of these subfolders of MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/config: • FoundationServices • Foundation NOTE: The Foundation subfolder contains the .reg.properties file, which is required for recovery.

y m

3. Optional: Perform a monthly or weekly backup of MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/domains/EPMSystem/servers/Fo undationServices0/logs, which contains historical information.

e d a

c A

Backing Up the Database In most companies, the database administrator is expected to perform database backups and restores. This class does not discuss database backup steps in detail. Consult your database administration guide for complete backup procedures.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

To back up the database for Workspace and Shared Ser vices: 1. Navigate to your database system tables.

2. Back up the Shared Services and Workspace schema if you use Oracle RDBMS; otherwise, back up the SQL Server or DB2 database. Recovering Workspace and Shared Services Make sure that you properly backed up the Foundation Services database and file system before performing a restore.

e l c

a r O 14-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

To recover Workspace and Shared Ser vices: 1. Recover all components that you backed up, including Shared Services Registry, by placing the copied directories and files in their original locations. 2. Restart all product and related services.

Essbase You must often back up the following Essbase components: • Applications • Calculation Scripts • Security files • Configuration settings File System Backup You can use the file system backup software of your choice. You can back up specific directories or files, or you can back up the entire Essbase directory structure. Back up all .ind and .pag files related to a database because a single database can have multiple .ind and .pag files. Shut down the Agent before backing up essbase.sec.

y m

e d a

Data Export in a Text Format You can export data copies to a file that you specify. If you export to a text file, Essbase does not compress data. The text export file contains data only and does not include control, outline, or security information.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

You can use text export files to load data from the source database into databases on other platforms. Consider exporting data for the following purposes: • To transfer data across platforms

• To back up only part of the data; for example, level 0 blocks

• To create an exported file in text format, rather than binary format • You can export data using the following tools: • Essbase Administration Services • Report Writer

e l c

• ESSCMD

a r O

• MaxL

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

14-11

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Performance Management Architect You should backup the Performance Management Architect database regularly. If you change the configuration settings, you should also backup the file system. To back up Performance Management Architect: 1. Back up the Performance Management Architect database and file system. For details, see Common Backup Tasks in this lesson. 2. Periodically back up EPM_ORACLE_HOME/products/Foundation/BPMA/AppServer/DimensionServer/Se rverEngine/bin/bpma_server_config.xml. To recover Performance Management Architect: 1. Restore the Performance Management Architect database that you backed up. 2. Recover configuration settings by restoring the file system that you backed up. 3. Install Dimension Services Server by running EPM_ORACLE_HOME/products/Foundation/BPMA/AppServer/DimensionServer/Se rverEngine/bin/services_build_helper.exe INSTALL PROD.

y m

e d a

4. Create a virtual directory for hyperion-bpma-server in Internet Information Services (IIS) that references this folder:

c A

EPM_ORACLE_HOME/products/Foundation/BPMA/AppServer/DimensionServer/We bServices

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

5. Ensure that the .NET version of the Web application is 2.0, and enable ASP.NET 2.0 extension. 6. Ensure that write access for C:/Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data is enabled for NETWORK SERVICE user. 7. Run the following scripts in MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/bin/deploymentScripts/instal lServiceScripts to install the J2EE Web tier services: • installServiceEPMADataSynchronizer.bat • installServiceEPMAWebServer.bat

e l c

8. Restart the product and any related services.

a r O 14-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Planning You should backup Planning system and application databases regularly. To back up Planning: 1. Back up the Planning relational database. 2. Back up the following Windows registry entries: • HKLM/Software/Oracle* nodes • HKLM/System/CurrentControlSet/Services/Oracle* 3. Back up the Essbase outline files for your applications. 4. Back up the full export of Essbase data. 5. Back up any calculation scripts and substitution variables associated with Essbase. 6. Back up the file system folder that contains Planning shared libraries: • 32-bit: EPM_ORACLE_HOME/products/Planning/lib

y m

• 64-bit: EPM_ORACLE_HOME/products/Planning/lib64 7. UNIX: Back up custom scripts, such as startup files associated with Planning.

e d a

8. Back up of EPM_ORACLE_HOME/products/Planning directory incuding the following files: • log4J.properties

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• essbase.properties

c A

To recover Planning:

1. Stop all product and related services.

2. Replace backed up files and directories in the original locations. 3. Restore the Planning databases. 4. Restart all servers and services.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

14-13

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Calculation Manager To enable recovery after a failure, you should back up the database that you use with Calculation Manager, as described in the RDBMS documentation. Additional precautions you can take: • Back up the product components in EPM_ORACLE_HOME/products/Foundation/CALC. • Perform a weekly full or daily incremental backup of MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/domains/EPMSystem/servers/CalcMgr0/logs .

Smart View To back up Smart View, copy the Microsoft Office XLS, XLSX, DOC, DOCX, PPT, and PPTX files that contain your generated data, and place them on a storage device or in another location. To recover data after a failure or crash, replace the copied files in the original location.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 14-14

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Managing EPM System Log Files

Diagnostics Folder

y m

Product Log Folders

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Managing EPM System Log Files

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

EPM System products continually generate log file and audit information. It is important to archive these files periodically so that the file size does not become unmanageable. Most EPM System products use the ODL framework for logging purposes. ODL provides plug-in components that complement the standard Java framework to automatically integrate log data with Oracle log analysis tools. In the ODL framework, log files are formatted as text documents. Another key benefit of ODL is that log file rotation is supported. ODL consists of two file types: • Configuration files

e l c

• Log files

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

14-15

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Configuration Files ODL uses a configuration file to manage and limit the logging information for EPM System products. Each configuration file contains options for log file location, size, rotation, logging level, and so on. Configuration File Properties The following table lists some of the configurable properties in the logging.xml file. For a complete list, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Release 11.1.2 Installation and Configuration Troubleshooting Guide. Property Name

Description

path

Log path

format

Format to use (in ODL-text)

maxFileSize

The maximum size in bytes for each log file. When the main log file reaches the given size, it triggers a log rotation, where the main log file is archived and a new log file is created.

maxLogSize

The maximum size in bytes for the entire log. Older archive files are deleted to keep the total log size under the given limit.

rotationFrequency

The frequency, in minutes, for rotating the logs. The value must be a number (minutes), or hour, day, or week (values are not case-sensitive).

retentionPeriod

The time period for which older log file should be kept. Files that are older than the given period are deleted. Files are deleted only when there is a log rotation, no background thread deletes log files. As a result, files may not be deleted for some time after the retention period expires. The value must be a number (minutes), or day, week, month (30 days) or year (values are not case sensitive).

e l c

y m

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 14-16

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Property Name

Description

keepOpen

If the flag is set to true, the main log file is kept open all times. If the flag is set to false, the main log file is open and closed upon each log operation. The default value is true.

deleteFiles

This flag determines whether archive files can be deleted when the total log size reaches the maximum limit. In most cases, the default value for the flag is true, which means that old files can be deleted. In rare use cases, in which archive files should not be deleted, this flag can be set to false. Note: If deleteFiles is set to false, and a maxLogSize limit is set, messages are not logged after the log size reaches the specified maxLogSize limit.

Message Types Message type is the standard ODL terminology for a log level. Message types are controlled from the configuration file in loggers. Oracle recommends that you set a lower message type as the default to allow for finer control.

y m

The following table lists the message types in the logging.xml file:

e d a

Message Type

Description

ERROR

A serious problem that requires immediate attention from the System Administrator and is not caused by a bug in the product.

WARNING

A potential problem that the system administrator should review.

NOTIFICATION TRACE

UNKNOWN

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

A major lifecycle event such as the activation or deactivation of a primary sub-component or feature. Trace or debug information for events, such as public API entry/exit points. The messages should be understandable to those who do not know internal implementation details. May be used when the type is unknown.

Modifying Configuration Files You use a text editor to modify configuration files.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

14-17

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

To modify configuration files: 1. Locate the configuration files (logging.xml) for each product. 2. Open the file in a text editor and update the properties or message type. 3. Click Save. 4. Restart the component process. Location of Configuration Files The default installation directory is Oracle/Middleware. The Middleware home location is referred to as MIDDLEWARE_HOME throughout this chapter. The following table lists the location of the configuration files by product: Product

Configuration File Location

EPM System Configurator

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/EPMSystem11R1/common/confi g/11.1.2.0/configTool-logging.xml

Shared Services and Workspace

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/d omains/EPMSystem/config/fmwconfig/servers/Foun dationServices0/logging.xml

Shared Services for LCM

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/empsystem1/c onfig/FoundationServices/logging.xml

Performance Management Architect Dimension Server

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/c onfig/EPMA/DimensionServer/logging.xml

Performance Management Architect Web Server

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/d omains/EPMSystem/config/fmwconfig/servers/EPMA WebReports0/logging.xml

Calculation Manager

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/d omains/EPMSystem/config/fmwconfig/servers/calc mgr0/logging.xml

Essbase Server

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/E ssbaseServe/essbaseserver1/bin/logging.xml

e d a

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Essbase Administration Services

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/d omains/EPMSystem/config/fmwconfig/servers/eas0 /logging.xml

Essbase Studio

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/B PMS/bpms1/bin/logging.xml

Oracle Hyperion Provider Services

e l c

y m

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/d omains/EPMSystem/config/fmwconfig/servers/Anal yticProviderServices0/logging.xml

a r O 14-18

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Product

Configuration File Location

Reporting and Analysis Framework

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/d omains/EPMSystem/config/fmwconfig/servers/RaFr amework0/logging.xml

Reporting and Analysis Framework Services

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/c onfig/ReportingAnalysis/logging/logging_ra.xml

Log Files Each product, component, service, or servlet has its own log file. In a distributed installation, all services of one type log their messages to one file. Separate log files are generated for license information, configuration, and, if necessary, environment information. Log Message File Format The following table lists the log message format and descriptions: Log Message Format

Description

Time Stamp

Date and time when the message was generated, adjusted for time difference between the host where the message was generated and the host of the common repository. This field is set only when the log message is written to a central repository and should not be set by components.

y m

e d a

Example: [2010-01-22T05:23:31.755-08:00] Component ID

c A

The component that originated the message. The format is EPMXXX where XXX is the name of the product.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Example: [FoundationServices0].

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

14-19

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Log Message Format

Description

Message Type

Defined message types: ERROR, WARNING, NOTIFICATION, and TRACE. The value UNKNOWN may be used when the type is unknown. • ERROR—A serious problem that requires immediate attention from the System Administrator and is not caused by a bug in the product. • WARNING—A potential problem that should be reviewed by the System Administrator. • NOTIFICATION—A major lifecycle event such as the activation or deactivation of a primary subcomponent or feature. • TRACE—Trace or debug information for events that are meaningful to users, such as public API entry/exit points. The messages should be understandable by those who do not know internal implementation details. • UNKNOWN (may be used when the type is unknown).

Message ID

A short identifier that uniquely identifies the message. Example: [EPMWKSP-000001]

Module ID

An identifier of the module that originated the message. The value is component-specific.

e d a

Example: [Initialization] Execution Context ID (ECID)

y m

Execution context ID helps connect multiple log files.

c A

Example: [ecid:0000IPMCrhW17ic5PjWByd1BMQPg000002,0]

Message Text

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I Actual log message.

a r O 14-20

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

EPM System Component Log Locations The following table lists the logs and log locations of EPM System components: EPM System Component and Log Location EPM System Installer logs MIDDLEWARE_HOME/EP MSystem11R1/diagnostics/l ogs/install

Name and Contents common-install.log—Common Component files activity; for example, ODBC common-ocm-install.log—OCM (Oracle Configuration Manager) activity common-ohs-install.log—Activity of OHS, (Oracle's HTTP Web server) which is silently installed from an embedded installer. common-ohs-oui-out.log—Oracle Universal Installer information about OHS install common-product-install.log—Product common component files activity; for example, ADM drivers, CRS utility common-staticcontent-install.log—Static content files

y m

common-wl-install.log—WebLogic files install-ocm-output.log—OCM files

e d a

installTool-install-DDD-MM.DD.YYYY-TIME.log— Main log written by EPM System Installer to log user activity

c A

installTool-install-stderr.log and installToolinstall-stdout.log—Console normal and error output.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

PRODUCT—install.log—Installation failure of product assembliesIndicates whether a product assembly installation fails. (each assembly has a log file.); for example, hss-install.log for Shared Services

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

14-21

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

EPM System Configurator logs

config/configtool.log—Configuration task output and warning messages.

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/use r_projects/epmsystem1/di agnostics/logs/

config/registry.log—Trace of registry calls made during configuration. css/css.log—Trace of CSS calls made during configuration. config/cmcconfig.log—Trace of Reporting and Analysis Configuring and Monitoring console (CMC) calls made during configuration. config/configtool_summary.log—Summary status about pass/fail tasks config/ocm-config.log—OCM configuration log config/SharedServices_Security.log—HSS registration log

Web Server logs—For Oracle HTTP Server (OHS)OHS created with EPM System Installer

console~OHS~1.log ohs_component.log access_log.log

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/use r_projects/epmsystem1/ht tpConfig/ohs/diagnostics/l ogs/OHS/ohs_component

y m

e d a

Shared Services

SharedServices_Admin.log—User management activity

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/use r_projects/epmsystem1/di agnostics/logs/sharedserv ices

SharedServices_Audit.log—Audit server errors while reading/writing audit information to the database or while configuring auditing

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

SharedServices_Audit_Client.log—Information about the client

SharedServices_Hub.log—Shared Services context listener activity SharedServices_LCM.log—Lifecycle mManagement activity SharedServices_Metadata.log—Information about metadata management and registration SharedServices_Registry.log—Shared Services Registry activity

e l c

a r O 14-22

SharedServices_Security.log—External authentication and single sign-on activity SharedServices_TaskFlow.log—Information about taskflows

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

EPM Workspace

Workspace.log—General messages

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/use r_projects/epmsystem1/di agnostics/logs/Foundatio nServices

WorkspaceConfig.log—EPM Workspace settings, product integrations WorkspacePrefs.log—Preferences-related messages activity WorkspaceSecurity.log—Authentication requests, security messages, logon or logoff, and session creation or termination.

Financial Management

HsvEventLog.log—Financial Management activity

MIDDLEWARE_HOME/use r_projects/empsystem1/di agnostics/logs/hfm Performance Management Architect MIDDLEWARE_HOME/use r_projects/empsystem1/di agnostics/logs/epma

datasync.log—Logging information from data synchronization activities; for example, validation and execution errors from connectors DimensionServer.log—Activities from the dimension server; for example, all dimension manipulation, and export activities epma.log—EPMAPerformance Management Architect wWeb tier activities; for example, deployment activities, LCM activities, and product interaction activities

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

14-23

Lesson 14

Performing System Maintenance

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Describe the backup and recovery process • Backup repositories, databases, and file systems • Backup the Windows registry • Backup and recover EPM System products • Manage EPM System log files

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 14-24

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

L E S S O N

1 5

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

15

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Describe Lifecycle Management • Identify the artifacts that you can migrate • View and search for artifacts • Explain the application and artifact migration process

y m

• Select the appropriate migration scenario for your environment

• Identify the tasks that you can perform using the Lifecycle Management Utility • Run the Lifecycle Management Utility • Access and view migration status reports

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Enable and view audit reports

a r O

e l c

c A

e d a

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Lifecycle Management Overview LCM provides a consistent, repeatable process to migrate applications, artifacts, and users from one operating environment to another environment.

Development

Test

Production

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Lifecycle Management Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

After successfully deploying an application in an environment, you can use Lifecycle Management (LCM) to migrate the application, repository, or individual artifacts across product environments and operating systems. Migration is the process of copying all or part of an application instance from one operating environment to another. For example, you can migrate an application from development to test or from test to production. Artifacts are individual application or repository items; for example, scripts, data forms, rules files, documents, financial reports, and so forth. With LCM, you can perform the following tasks: • Viewing applications and directories

e l c

• Searching for artifacts

a r O

• Migrating directly from one application to another • Migrating to and from the file system

15-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

• Saving and loading migration definition files • Viewing selected artifacts • Auditing migrations • Viewing the status of migrations • Importing and exporting individual artifacts for quick changes on the file system

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-3

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Migrating on Connected and Disconnected Environments You can register applications for the same Shared Services or for different Shared Services. Connected environment

Disconnected environment

Shared Services

Direct migration

Migration through intermediary file

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

y m

e d a

c A

Migrating on Connected and Disconnected Environments

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

You can install applications on connected or disconnected environments. • You install applications on connected environments when the source and destination environments are registered for the same instance of Shared Services. You can migrate applications directly or through an intermediary file. • You install applications on disconnected environments when the source and destination environments are registered for different instances of Shared Services. For example, you can register the test and production environments for their individual Shared Services. You migrate applications through an intermediary file.

e l c

a r O 15-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

LCM Requirements Note the requirements below as you use the LCM functionality.

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

LCM Requirements

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Note the following requirements as you use the LCM functionality: • Shared Services and the core product must be installed and configured. • Source and destination applications must be registered with an instance of Shared Services. • During export, Shared Services source applications must be running. During import, Shared Services destination applications must be running. • For application-to-application migrations, the source and destination applications must be registered with the same Shared Services instance and should be accessible to Shared Services Console on the network.

e l c

• If you are migrating to or from a file system, the file system should be accessible to Shared Services Console on the network.

a r O

• Since the default destination for file system migrations is on the Shared Services Web application server computer, space must be allocated on the Shared Services computer.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-5

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

LCM Security In order to use LCM, a user must have an administrator role and a Lifecycle Management administrator role. With the LCM administrator role, you can perform LCM on any application registered with Shared Services.

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

LCM Security

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

To use Lifecycle Management, you must provision users and groups using the standard provisioning process. You must be provisioned with the following roles to use LCM with Financial Management and Planning: • Application Administrator • Application Creator • LCM Administrator

e l c

a r O 15-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

About Artifacts

Data Forms

Dimensions

Reports

Security

y m

Documents

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

About Artifacts

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Artifacts are individual application or repository items, such as scripts, Web and data forms, rules files, documents, and financial reports. Application and repository artifacts are organized into categories by product. For a complete list of artifacts, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Lifecycle Management Guide.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-7

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Planning Artifacts Configuration

Data

Global Artifacts

Plan Types

Security

User Preferences

Planning Units

Substitution Variables

Plan Type 1

Access Permissions

User Variables

Cell Text

Business Rules

Plan Type 2

Application Settings

Text Values

Task Lists

Plan Type 3

Account Annotations

Spread Patterns

Supporting Details

and more…

y m

Note: Artifacts vary by implementation

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Planning Artifacts

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You use Lifecycle Management to migrate the following types of Planning artifacts: • Configuration—user preferences, user variables, and application settings • Relational data—planning units, cell text, text values, account annotations, and supporting details • Global artifacts—substitution variables, business rules, task lists, spread patterns, and so on • Plan types

• Security—access permissions

e l c

a r O 15-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Note the following when migrating applications: • Before migrating classic applications, you must create destination shell applications in native Planning. Destination shell applications are not required for Performance Management Architect applications. • For the very first migration of Performance Management Architect applications, you must migrate dimensions and set the application to deploy after import before migrating the associated Planning application. • For Classic Administration and Performance Management Architect, you must create data sources prior to migrating applications.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-9

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Performance Management Architect Artifacts Application Metadata

Shared Dimensions

Dimension Access

Data Synchronization

Application Properties

Entity

Import Profiles

Synchronizations

Import Profile

Account

Mapping Tables

Common Dimensions

and any other dimension in the Shared Library…

External File Definitions

Calculation Manager Artifacts

Interface Table Definitions

y m

Note: Artifacts vary by implementation

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Performance Management Architect Artifacts

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You use Lifecycle Management to migrate repository content for the following types of Performance Management Architect artifacts: • Application metadata—application properties, import profiles, common dimensions, and calculation manager artifacts • Shared dimensions • Dimension Access

• Data synchronization—synchronizations. mapping tables, external file definitions, and interface table definitions Performance Management Architect artifacts are listed under the EPMA node in the Foundation application group in the Shared Services Console.

e l c

a r O 15-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Essbase Artifacts • • • • • • • • •

Substitution Variables Rule Files Calculation Scripts Report Scripts Excel Files Location Aliases Security Filters Text Files Database Outlines

y m

Note: Artifacts vary by implementation

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Essbase Artifacts

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You use Lifecycle Management to migrate repository content for the following Essbase artifacts: • Substitution variables • Rule files

• Calculation scripts • Report scripts • Excel files

• Location aliases

e l c

• Security filters

a r O

• Text files

• Database outlines

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-11

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Calculation Manager Artifacts

Rules, Formulas, Scripts

Rule Sets

Templates

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Calculation Manager Artifacts

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You use Lifecycle Management to migrate the following types of Calculation Manager artifacts: • Rules • Formulas • Scripts • Rule sets • Templates

Calculation Manager artifacts are listed under the Foundation application group in the Shared Services Console.

e l c

a r O 15-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Foundation Services Artifacts Native Directory • Users • Groups • Roles • Delegated Lists • Assigned Roles

Deployment Metadata • Shared Services Registry • Product Registry

Task Flows

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Foundation Services Artifacts

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Aside from Performance Management Architect and Calculation Manager artifacts, the Foundation application group includes artifacts for: • Shared Services

- Native Directory—includes users, groups, roles, delegated lists, and assigned roles. - Task Flows—contains information on the automation of a business process in which tasks are passed from one taskflow participant to another according to procedural rules. • Deployment Metadata—contain physical server names and configuration information for the deployment.

e l c

a r O

- Shared Services Registry—enable you to view registry content and export registry data to the file system where it can be edited and reimported. - Product Registry—enable you to edit application configuration information on a given environment.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-13

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

NOTE: Do not use Lifecycle Management to migrate deployment metadata artifacts from one environment to another. Migrating this data will corrupt the configuration information on the destination environment and make the system unusable. Only LCM administrators can view Shared Services artifacts in the Foundation application group.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 15-14

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Viewing and Searching for Artifacts

Click Search Artifacts

Click Expand to view artifact list

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Viewing and Searching for Artifacts

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The Lifecycle Management interface enables you to view, search, migrate, load, export, and import artifacts. The artifacts are sorted into application groups and categories. The tabular Lifecycle Management interface enables you to view multiple applications. To view artifacts:

1. In the View Pane, expand the Application Groups node. 2. Expand an application group.

3. Click an application to view the artifact listing (or right-click the application and select Explore).

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-15

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

To search for artifacts: 1. View artifacts as described in the previous procedure. 2. Click Search Artifacts. 3. Enter search options: • Artifact Name—The name of the artifact. Use an asterisk (*) as the wildcard in pattern searches or to search for artifacts that match filter conditions. For example, entering A* returns all artifacts that begin with A (or lowercase a, since the search is not case-sensitive). *A returns all artifacts that end with A (or lowercase a). • Date Modified • Start Date • End Date • Modified By—The name of the user. Use an asterisk (*) as the wildcard in pattern searches or to search for artifacts that match filter conditions. The search is not case-sensitive.

y m

NOTE: Note: If you do not enter search criteria, all artifacts are displayed upon search.

e d a

4. Click Search.

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 15-16

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Application and Artifact Migration Process To perform a migration:

Launch Shared Services Console

View and select the source artifacts for migration

Launch the Migration Wizard and define the migration

Launch and view the Migration Status Report

Execute the migration

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Application and Artifact Migration Process

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

The following five step process outlines the process for migrating applications and artifacts: 1. Launch Shared Services Console.

2. View and select the source artifacts for migration.

3. Launch the Migration Wizard and define the migration. 4. Execute the migration.

5. Launch and view the Migration Status Report.

When you define your migration, you can save the migration definition to a file for reuse. Migration definition files are saved in XML format. In a migration definition, you can specify multiple tasks to migrate multiple applications together.

e l c

a r O

You can use the migration XML file with the command-line utility to perform batch processing. Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-17

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Migration Scenarios Application to Application

To and From the file system

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Migration Scenarios

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You can migrate artifacts directly from one application to another or to and from the file system. Some EPM System products do not support direct application-to-application migration through Lifecycle Management. For example, to migrate a classic application, you must create a shell destination classic application before performing an application-toapplication migration.

e l c

a r O 15-18

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Migration Guidelines • •

Create a shell application in the destination environment Migrate artifacts in a specific order

Source Application

Destination Application

Test

Production

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Migration Guidelines

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

When migrating applications and artifacts to a new environment, follow these guidelines: • For classic applications, create a shell application in the destination environment • For application to application migrations (both classic and Performance Management Architect), you must create a shell application in the destination environment • Create data sources for the destination application • Import the following artifacts in the order listed:

- Performance Management Architect artifacts - Calculation Manager artifacts

e l c

- Shared Services artifacts

a r O

- Planning artifacts - Reporting and Analysis (Financial Reporting and Web Analysis)

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-19

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

For the very first migration, the Performance Management Architect dimensions must be migrated and deployed first, then the non-dimensional artifacts can be migrated. NOTE: Lifecycle Management does not support migration of EA templates, Favorites, or Planning data.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 15-20

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Migrating Directly from One Application to Another

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Migrating Directly from One Application to Another

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Direct application to application migrations can only occur between “like” applications that are registered with the same Shared Services instance. For example, Essbase to Essbase, Planning to Planning, or Financial Management to Financial Management. You cannot migrate a Financial Management application to a Planning application. To migrate directly from one application to another: 1. Log on to Shared Services Console. 2. Expand Application Groups.

3. View and select the applications to be migrated.

e l c

4. Click Define Migration to display Application Migration Wizard.

a r O

5. On the Source page, select the source applications for migration, and click Next.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-21

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

6. On the Source Options page, enter information about the source, and click Next. 7. On the Destination page, specify the Applications destination, and click Next 8. On the Destination Options page, review the destination options, and click Next. 9. On the Migration Summary page, review the source and destination options that you specified. 10. Optional: Click Back to make changes. 11. Save the migration definition for a later migration or click Execute Migration. 12. Click OK.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 15-22

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Migrating Applications to a File System

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Migrating Applications to a File System

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You use the Application Migration Wizard to migrate applications and artifacts to a file system for both the connected and disconnected environments. To migrate applications and artifacts to a file system: 1. Log on to Shared Services Console. 2. Expand Application Groups.

3. Select the application or artifacts that you want to migrate. 4. Click Define Migration.

e l c

The Application Migration Wizard is displayed.

5. On the Source page, select the source application for migration and click Next.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-23

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

6. Click Next. The Destination page is displayed. 7. Select File System. 8. In the text box, enter the name of the folder. The exported file system is saved at the following location: \Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\epmsystem1\import_ex port\admin@NativeDirectory. It is displayed in the view pane under File System. 9. Click Next to display the Destination Options page. 10. Click Next to display the Migration Summary page. 11. Review the migration details, and click Execute Migration. 12. Click OK.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 15-24

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Migrating Applications from the File System to a Destination Application You use the Application Migration Wizard to migrate applications and artifacts from the file system to a destination application.

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

e d a

c A

Migrating Applications from the File System to a Destination Application

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

After migrating the applications and artifacts from the source application to the file system, you transfer the exported files from the source instance of Shared Services to the destination instance of Shared Services (in a disconnected environment). In a connected environment, use Application Migration Wizard to migrate applications and artifacts from the intermediary file to a destination application.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-25

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

To migrate applications and artifacts from the file system file to a destination application: 1. Copy the exported files from the source file system and paste to the destination user projects folder. The exported artifact folders are saved to the following location: \Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\epmsystem1\import_ex port\admin@NativeDirectory. You should copy the artifact file system folders to the same directory in the destination environment. 2. Log on to destination instance of Shared Services. 3. Expand Application Groups. 4. Expand File System. 5. Select the file system artifact that you created in the source environment. The application and artifacts in the file are displayed. 6. Select the application or artifacts that you want to migrate.

y m

7. Click Define Migration to display the Application Migration Wizard.

8. If the source application is displayed, select the application and click Remove Source. 9. Select the file for migration. 10. Click Next to display the Source Options page. 11. Click Next to display the Destination page.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

12. Select the destination application.

13. Click Next to display the Destination Options page. 14. Specify the destination options.

15. Click Next to display the Migration Summary page.

16. Review the migration settings, and click Execute Migration. 17. Click OK.

e l c

a r O 15-26

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Exporting and Importing Individual Artifacts for Editing You can export individual artifacts to the file system, edit them, and import them after editing.

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

e d a

c A

Exporting and Importing Individual Artifacts for Editing

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

You can export or import a single artifact to or from the local file system without using Application Migration Wizard. To export individual artifacts:

1. Log on to Shared Services Console.

2. In the view pane, expand the Application Groups containing the artifact. 3. Expand the application to display the individual artifact. 4. Right-click the artifact and select Export for Edit.

e l c

5. In the File Download dialog box, click Save.

6. Specify the save location on the local file system and click Save.

a r O

If you export the artifact in an XML file, you can modify the exported artifact in the file system before importing it.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-27

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

To import individual artifacts: 1. Log on to Shared Services. 2. In the view pane, expand the Application Groups containing the artifact. 3. Expand the application to display the individual artifacts. 4. Right-click the artifact in the application and select Import after Edit. The Import After Edit dialog box is displayed. 5. Click Browse and select the file where the edited artifact is saved. 6. Click Finish. NOTE: Artifacts must already reside in the system to perform an edit and an import.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 15-28

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Automating Migration Tasks You use the Lifecycle Management Utility to: • Schedule migrations using a third-party scheduling service such as Windows Task Scheduler or Oracle Enterprise Manager • Ensure secure access to the utility • Run migrations using a migration definition file • View error logs to facilitate troubleshooting

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Automating Migration Tasks

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The Lifecycle Management Utility is a command-line tool that supports the migration of artifacts across product environments and operating systems. The utility provides an alternate way to migrate entire applications, or individual artifacts, from source to destination. You use the Lifecycle Management Utility to:

• Schedule migrations using a third-party scheduling service such as Windows Task Scheduler or Oracle Enterprise Manager • Ensure secure access to the utility

• Run migrations using a migration definition file

e l c

• View error logs to facilitate troubleshooting

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-29

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Running the Lifecycle Management Utility Follow these steps when using the utility: 1. Create the migration definition file 2. Modify the migration definition file 3. Modify the property file 4. Open a command prompt 5. Enter command arguments

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Running the Lifecycle Management Utility

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Follow these steps when using the utility:

1. Create the migration definition file—Define the artifacts for migration in a migration definition file. A sample migration definition file can be found in EPM_ORACLE_HOME/common/utilities/LCM/11.1.2.0/Sample. 2. Modify the migration definition file for the migration—If you created a migration definition file in Shared Services Console, you must modify connection options to match your destination environment. 3. Modify the property file—Set the global parameters for Lifecycle Management Utility migrations in themigration.properties file. The migration.properties file is located in MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/Config/FoundationServices.

e l c

a r O 15-30

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

4. Open a command prompt—Open a command prompt window and navigate to MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/bin. 5. Enter command arguments—Execute the utility.bat file to run the utility. Enter the following command line Utility.bat . For example: Utility.bat c:/lcm/lcmdefinition.xml.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-31

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Accessing and Viewing Migration Status Reports

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

e d a

c A

Accessing and Viewing Migration Status Reports

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

You can access and view Migration Status Reports from the Administration menu in Shared Services Console. When you execute a migration, you can immediately view the status of the migration in the Migration Status Report. To view the Migration Status Report in Shared Services Console, select Administration, and then Migration Status Report.

e l c

a r O 15-32

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Viewing Audit Reports You must enable auditing before you can view Audit Reports.

y m

Copy right © 2010, O rac le and/or its affiliates. All rights res erved.

Viewing Audit Reports

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Every action performed in Lifecycle Management is logged in the following audit reports: • Security reports—Displays information on role provisioning for selected artifacts. • Artifact reports—Displays information on the artifacts that were imported or exported using the LCM functionality. • Configuration reports—Generates an audit report about the configuration tasks that were performed in the past. NOTE: You must enable auditing before you can view audit reports.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-33

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

To enable auditing: 1. Log on to Shared Services Console. 2. In the view pane, select Application Groups. 3. Select Administration, and then Configure Auditing. The Audit Configuration dialog box is displayed. 4. Select Enable Auditing. 5. From Select Tasks, select the artifacts and objects to include in auditing reports. 6. Click OK. 7. When prompted to save the configuration, click Yes. To view audit reports: 1. In Shared Services Console, select Administration, and then Audit Reports. 2. Select a report type:

y m

• Security Reports • Artifact Reports

e d a

• Config Reports 3. Enter report parameters:

c A

• Performed By—Select the users for which the report is to be generated or select all users.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Performed During—Select the period for which the report is to be generated. 4. Perform an action:

• Click View Report.

• Select Detailed View and then click View Report to display the report based on the modified attribute and the new attribute value. 5. Optional: Click Export to export the report to a CSV file, which can be opened in Microsoft Excel. By default, the artifact report is named AuditArtifactReport.txt.

e l c

6. Click Close.

a r O 15-34

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Describe Lifecycle Management • Identify the artifacts that you can migrate • View and search for artifacts • Explain the application and artifact migration process • Select the appropriate migration scenario for your environment • Identify the tasks that you can perform using the Lifecycle Management Utility

y m

e d a

• Run the Lifecycle Management Utility • Access and view migration status reports • Enable and view audit reports

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

15-35

Lesson 15

Performing Migrations with Lifecycle Management

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O 15-36

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A P P E N D I X

A

Integrating with Planning

A

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • List integration options • Describe Outline Load Utility, Oracle Data Integrator, Data Integration Management, FDM, and Enterprise Resource Planning Integrato • Install FDM and ERP Integrator • Configure FDM and ERP Integrator

y m

• Create applications in FDM

e d a

• Work with ERP Integrator

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Integration Options Overview

Outline Load Utility

Oracle Data Integrator

Financial Data Quality Management

Data Integration Management

Enterprise Resource Planning Integrator

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Integration Options Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

You can perform data integration tasks with Planning by using the following Oracle products: • Outline Load Utility

• Oracle Data Integrator (ODI)

• Data Integration Management (DIM)

• Financial Data Quality Management (FDM)

• Enterprise Resource Planning Integrator (ERP Integrator) These products are described in the succeeding topics.

e l c

a r O A-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Outline Load Utility Overview You can load metadata and data for the following Planning objects using the Outline Load utility: • Account • User-defined dimensions • Period • Attributes and UDAs • Year • Exchange rates • Scenario • Smart Lists • Version • Planning Unit Hierarchies • •

Currency Entity

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Outline Load Utility Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You can load metadata and data for the following Planning objects using the Outline Load Utility: • Account • Period • Year • Scenario • Version • Currency

e l c

• Entity

a r O

• User-defined dimensions • Attributes and UDAs

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-3

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

• Exchange rates • Smart Lists • Planning Unit Hierarchies When loading data with the Outline Load utility, you can specify driver members in the following: • Planning Data Load Administration page • CSV load file If you load data using a CSV load file, you run the utility with the /TR option. The CSV file must list the driver member and all other members under the POV column, regardless of their location on the data form. For example, if January or Descendants (YearTotal) are columns in a data form, you must list January and every member descendant under Year Total in the POV column. When using the /TR option, you can load one value per row in the CSV file. You can include multiple rows, but you can specify only one data value per row. The following list summarizes the high-level steps needed to load data with Outline Load Utility:

y m

1. Set Planning System properties. 2. Set driver members. 3. Generate a comma-separated load file. 4. Test the load file and run the utility.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

To load data with Outline Load Utility:

1. Back up the application and application databases before loading information. 2. Set Planning System properties:

a. Log on to the Planning application.

b. Select Administration, then Application, then Properties, and then the System Properties tab.

e l c

a r O A-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

c. On the System Properties tab on the Manage Properties page, set the DIRECT_DATA_LOAD and DATA_LOAD_FILE_PATH properties. • If you set DIRECT_DATA_LOAD to True, or if you do not specify a value for this property, information is loaded directly into Essbase.Ensure that the outlines maintained in Planning and Essbase are synchronized. The CSV load file must not specify any Planning outline changes unless they were already refreshed to Essbase. • If you set DIRECT_DATA_LOAD to False, Outline Load Utility processes the CSV load file that you created to generate a data file (TXT) and a rule file (RUL). With this option, the Planning and Essbase outlines do not need to be synchronized because data is not loaded. You can refresh the changes at a later time to propagate the metadata changes to Essbase, and then load data directly into Essbase. In most cases, set DIRECT_DATA_LOAD to False, and set DATA_LOAD_PATH to the location and name that will be used for the generated data and rules files. For example, C:/myDirectory/App1.txt. d. Restart the Planning application server.

y m

3. If you want to load to driver members that are specified in Planning, set the driver members:

e d a

a. Log on to the Planning application for which data will be loaded. b. Select Administration, and then Data Load Settings.

c A

c. Select a dimension from the Data Load Dimension list (such as Account) for which you want to load data.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

d. Select a dimension from the Driver Dimension list (such as Period). e. Click the member selection icon to select members of the Driver Dimension (such as Jan, Feb, March). For example, these members may appear as columns in a Planning data form. 4. Generate a comma-separated load file containing the following columns: • Driver Member: The member into which data is loaded. You can define one driver dimension per load, and multiple members for the driver dimension. The value is passed as a string representing a numeric value or, if a smart list is bound to the member, as a smart list value.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-5

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

• Point-of-View: All other dimensions required to determine the intersection for which to load the data. If you are using the /TR option, include all members except the driver member. The data load automatically creates cross-product records based on the dimension parameters in the POV. The load file creates and loads the data record for each relevant cell intersection. The value is passed as a string. The POV accepts a comma-separated list of members, including member functions. For example, Children(Q1) is expanded to Jan, Feb, Mar during the load. The corresponding records are generated based on the cross product of all member combinations and the data value. • Data Load Cube Name: The name of the plan type to which data is being loaded. The value is passed as a string. Values include any plan types specified in the application, such as Plan1. 5. Test the load file and run the utility. a. Locate the Outline Load utility, installed by default in MIDDLEWARE_HOME/user_projects/epmsystem1/Planning/planning1. b. To confirm that the load file parses without any errors, run the utility with the /N option, and check the outline log file to ensure that no error messages were generated. Running the utility with the /N option does not load data or metadata, but ensures that the CSV load file parses successfully. For example, you can use this command line to check the load file for a Planning application called test:

y m

e d a

C:\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\epmsystem1\Planning\planning1>Ou tlineLoad /A:test /U:admin /M /N /I:c: \outline1data3.csv /D:Entity /L:c:/outlineLoad.log /X:c:/ outlineLoad.exe

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

c. Run the utility from the command prompt without the /N option, using the casesensitive command, one space, and the appropriate parameters. For example:

C:\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\epmsystem1\Planning \planning1>OutlineLoad /A:test /U:admin /M /I:c: \outline1data3.csv /D:Entity /L:c:/outlineLoad.log /X:c:/ outlineLoad.exe If you are loading data without specifying driver members within Planning, you can run the utility with the /TR option. For example:

e l c

C:\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\epmsystem1\Planning\planning1>Outl ineLoad /A:test /U:admin /M /N /I:c: \outline1data3.csv /TR /D:Entity /L:c:/outlineLoad.log /X:c:/ outlineLoad.exe

a r O A-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Oracle Data Integrator Overview With Oracle Data Integrator, you can: • • •

•

Execute high-volume, high-performance loading of data. Call on external services to integrate, deploy, and transform data seamlessly within an SOA infrastructure. Use Master Data Management (MDM) to provide a comprehensive data synchronization infrastructure for customers. Provide efficient bulk load of historical data (including complex transformations) from existing systems to new ones.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Data Integrator Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

ODI is a comprehensive data integration platform that covers all data integration requirements—from high-volume, high-performance batches, to event-driven, tricklefeed integration processes, to SOA-enabled data services. With Oracle Data Integrator, you can:

• Execute high-volume, high-performance loading of data warehouses, data marts, On Line Analytical Processing (OLAP) cubes, and analytical applications.Call on external services to integrate, deploy, and transform data seamlessly within an SOA infrastructure. • Use Master Data Management (MDM) to provide a comprehensive data synchronization infrastructure for customers who build their own data hubs, work with packaged MDM solutions, or coordinate hybrid MDM systems with integrated SOA process analytics and Business Process Execution Language (BPEL) compositions.

e l c

a r O

• Provide efficient bulk load of historical data (including complex transformations) from existing systems to new ones.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-7

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

ODI delivers unique next-generation Extract Load and Transform (ELT) technology that improves performance and reduces data integration costs, even across heterogeneous systems. ODI offers the productivity of a declarative design approach, as well as the benefits of an active integration platform for seamless batch and real-time integration. The ODI package includes Oracle Data Profiling and Oracle Data Quality for Data Integrator: • Oracle Data Profiling is a data investigation and quality monitoring tool. It allows business users to assess the quality of their data through metrics, to discover or infer rules based on this data, and to monitor the evolution of data quality over time. • Oracle Data Quality for Data Integrator is a comprehensive award-winning data quality platform that covers even the most complex data quality needs. Its powerful rule-based engine and its robust and scalable architecture place data quality and name and address cleansing at the heart of an enterprise data integration strategy. ODI Components Oracle Data Integrator is made up of the following components: • The modular Repository consists of a Master Repository and one or more Work Repositories.

y m

e d a

• The graphical interface modules consist of Topology Manager, Designer, Security Manager, Operator, and the execution agents that give access to the Repository.

c A

• Metadata Navigator is a Servlet/JSP application that enables access to the Repository through a Web interface.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Lightweight Designer is a Web application for viewing and editing objects in the repository through a Web browser. • Oracle Data Integrator Public Web Services are Web services that enable users to leverage Oracle Data Integrator features in a SOA. Oracle Data Profiling Components Oracle Data Profiling is made up of the following components:

• The Metabase Server contains the profiling data and metadata. • The Scheduler Server handles profiling jobs.

• The Oracle Data Quality User Interface is the client interface common to Oracle Data Profiling and Oracle Data Quality.

e l c

a r O

• The Oracle Data Quality ODBC Adapter is used to connect ODBC data sources. This optional component can be installed only on Windows platforms.

A-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Oracle Data Quality for Data Integrator In addition to using the same components as Oracle Data Profiling, Oracle Data Quality for Data Integrator includes the Data Quality Server, which is the run-time server for data quality projects.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-9

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Data Integration Management Overview • • • • • • •

•

API-based connectivity to Oracle's EPM System applications and Essbase Direct connectivity and data integration between Oracle's EPM System applications and Essbase with transactional systems. Codeless object-oriented visual data integration toolset Flexible, reusable workflows and mapping templates Highly scalable, high performance data integration capabilities Built-in scheduling and automation for data integration jobs Unified, metadata-based infrastructure allows for documenting and enforcing policies, standards, and procedures for all data integration processes Integrated user provisioning, installation, and configuration with Shared Services

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Data Integration Management Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

e d a

c A

DIM software is a data integration platform that enables companies to access, integrate, transform, and move any type of data between EPM System products and any system, in any frequency, and in any format, thus eliminating data fragmentation across the enterprise and optimizing Enterprise Performance Management and Business Intelligence deployments. DIM features include:

• API-based connectivity to Oracle's EPM System applications and Essbase, enabling extraction and loading of data and application-specific metadata. • Direct connectivity and data integration between Oracle's EPM System applications and Essbase with transactional systems.

e l c

• Codeless object-oriented visual data integration toolset.

a r O

• Flexible, reusable workflows and mapping templates

A-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

• Highly scalable, high-performance data integration capabilities • Built-in scheduling and automation for data integration jobs. • Unified, metadata-based infrastructure for documenting and enforcing policies, standards, and procedures for all data integration processes • Integrated user provisioning, installation, and configuration with Shared Services You use DIM Adapter for Planning to define target tables for loading data and metadata into Planning and use the target tables in workflows. You use these components to work with DIM Adapter for Planning: • Target Designer—The Targets menu of Warehouse Designer (in Data Integration Management) includes the Import from Hyperion Planning command for use with DIM Adapter for Planning. Selecting this command displays the Import Hyperion Planning Targets dialog box, which you use to connect to an application and import targets. • Target tables—The Writer plug-in can load these target table types: - Accounts

y m

- Employees

e d a

- Entities - User-defined dimensions - Attributes - UDAs

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

• Connection objects—You create connection objects in Workflow Manager for connecting to Planning applications. You can then select a connection object at runtime to configure the Planning targets for a session.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-11

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Financial Data Quality Management Overview

Data source

Reporting and Analysis

Financial Management

Planning

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Financial Data Quality Management Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

Essbase

e d a

c A

FDM is an out-of-the-box data transformation tool that feeds source-level financial data to consolidation, reporting, planning, and analytical applications. More than just a data translation tool, FDM provides an audit trail to the source financial data, helping to ensure data integrity and mapping consistency that allows for easy reconciliation of financial data. FDM saves end users, administrators, and auditors time associated with data error investigation, identification, and correction. FDM requires minimal IT involvement and offers a consistent, user-friendly environment that provides a uniform data collection process for all reporting units within the organization. It also contains financial controls functionality to assist corporations with their internal financial controls process. FDM contains prebuilt integration adaptors for Hyperion Enterprise, Financial Management, Essbase, and Planning; it can also be used to load data into any financial consolidation or analytical application.

e l c

a r O A-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Enterprise Resource Planning Integrator Overview

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Enterprise Resource Planning Integrator Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

As a module of FDM, ERP Integrator is the key application for integrating ERP systems with EPM System applications. ERP Integrator fits within the EPM System architecture and is accessed through Workspace, which uses Shared Services to authenticate users. The key to its integration lies within its underlying ODI engine. ERP Integrator sits on top of ODI and orchestrates the movement of metadata and data into EPM System applications. The application server can be deployed on multiple platforms, and it connects with EPM System applications (such as Financial Management and Planning) using Performance Management Architect, Classic Application Administration, or FDM.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-13

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

ERP Integrator provides the framework to drill through from the following EPM applications back to the ERP sources through FDM or ERP Integrator: • Planning • Financial Management • Smart View • Financial Reporting NOTE: For Smart View and Financial Reporting, users can drill through only if the data source is Financial Management or Planning, but not Essbase or Oracle© Hyperion Profitability and Cost Management, Fusion Edition. When you drill through, if data was loaded by FDM or ERP Integrator, a landing page is displayed in a new Workspace tab or a new window. The landing page acts as a gateway to the data in the source system.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O A-14

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Installing FDM and ERP Integrator

Financial Data Quality Management

Enterprise Resource Planning Integrator

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Installing FDM and ERP Integrator

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

The FDM installation consists of the following components: • Workbench client • Web application • ERP Integrator

• FDM Load Balancer • FDM Task Manager • FDM Server

e l c

You install all FDM components with EPM System Installer. You then use EPM System Configurator to register FDM with Shared Services. You can then launch a separate configuration utility for FDM components from the Start menu.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-15

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Configuring FDM and ERP Integrator

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring FDM and ERP Integrator

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You perform the following tasks to configure FDM and ERP Integrator: • ERP Integrator

- Configure Database

- Deploy to Application Server • FDM

- Configure FDM Web Application - Configure FDM Server

e l c

Additional configuration tasks for FDM are described in the following sections.

a r O A-16

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Configuring Web Server Components

This account information is stored in the IIS metabase.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring Web Server Components

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

When configuring Web server components, you must specify the Windows accounts under which .NET services and DCOM objects run. The Windows account must have full control permission for the FDM application folders, as well as rights to the target system. You must specify the name of a load balance server for the Web server components. This computer stores FDM application information and performs load balancing on application servers. If you specify a backup server, any time you create, modify, add, or remove an application, the application configuration file, FDMLoadBalancerGroups.xml, is copied from the load balance server to the backup load balance server. To configure Web ser ver components:

e l c

1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Financial Data Quality Management, then Web Server Components, and then Web Config Manager.

a r O

The Web Config Manager dialog box is displayed.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-17

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

2. On the General tab, enter the requested information. Reminder: The user name is the Windows service account used to run the .NET process and FDM DCOM objects. 3. On the Load Balance Server tab, enter the server name where the FDM load balance component is installed. 4. Click OK. 5. Open a command prompt, and enter IISReset to stop and restart the IIS service.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O A-18

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Configuring the Task Manager and Application Server Components

For Task Manager, assign this user account the “Logon as a Service” user right.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Configuring the Task Manager and Application Server Components

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Task Manager consists of a Windows service and a Windows client program. You must specify the Windows account under which the Windows service and FDM DCOM objects run. For Task Manager, you must also specify the name of a load balance server. The Windows account for Task Manager must have the following properties: • Full control permission for the FDM application folders residing on the data server • Rights to the target system

• “Logon as a Service” user rights

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-19

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

To configure Task Manager: 1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Financial Data Quality Management, then Task Manager, and then Task Manager Configuration. The Task Manager Configuration dialog box is displayed. 2. On the General tab, enter the requested information. Reminder: The user name is the Windows service account used to run the Task Manager service and FDM DCOM objects. 3. On the Load Balance Server tab, enter the FDM application server name where the FDM load balance components are installed. 4. Click OK. To configure the application ser ver: 1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Financial Data Quality Management, then Application Server, and then Application Server Config Manager. The Application Server Configuration dialog box is displayed.

y m

2. On the General tab, enter the requested information.

e d a

Reminder: The user name is the Windows service account used to run the FDM Application Server DCOM object. 3. Click OK.

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O A-20

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Configuring Load Balance Manager

Define a server cluster for load balancing.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring Load Balance Manager

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You perform the following tasks to configure Load Balance Manager: • Specify the Windows account under which Load Balance Manager DCOM objects run. The Windows account must have full control permission on the FDM application folders that reside on the data server. The account must also have rights to the target system. • Specify the application servers in the load-balancing cluster. • Define the external authentication provider (MSAD or LDAP). To configure Load Balance Manager:

e l c

1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Financial Data Quality Management, then Load Balance Manager, and then Load Balance Configuration.

a r O

The Load Balance Configuration dialog box is displayed.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-21

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

2. On the General tab, enter the requested information. Reminder: The user name is the Windows service account used to run the FDM Load Balance DCOM object. 3. On the Application Servers tab, click Add. 4. In the Application Server Name text box, enter the name of an FDM application server and click OK. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add other servers to the load-balancing cluster. 6. On the Authentication Providers tab, click Add. 7. Select the external authentication provider, and click OK. The Authentication Provider dialog box is displayed. 8. Enter the required information for the selected authentication provider, and click OK. The Load Balance Configuration dialog box is displayed. 9. Click OK.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O A-22

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Configuring Workbench

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuring Workbench

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

When configuring the Workbench client, you specify the computer that is running the FDM Load Balance Manager. This computer stores FDM application information and performs load balancing on application servers. To configure Workbench:

1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Financial Data Quality Management, then Workbench, and then Workbench client. The Workbench client is displayed.

2. In the Load Balance Server Groups window, click Add.

e l c

The Load Balance Server dialog box is displayed.

a r O

3. In the Group Name text box, enter DefaultLoadBalancer.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-23

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

4. In the Primary Server text box, enter the name of the application server that runs the FDM Load Balance Manager. 5. Optional: In the Backup Server text box, enter the name of the application server used as the backup server for load balancing. 6. Click OK.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O A-24

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Working with FDM After installing and configuring the FDM software, you perform these steps to create and configure an FDM application: 1. Create an FDM application 2. Import standard reports and templates 3. Install the Financial Management adapters 4. Connect to a Financial Management application

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Working with FDM

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

After installing and configuring the FDM software, you perform the following steps to create an FDM application: 1. Create an application

2. Import standard reports and templates 3. Install the Essbase adapter

4. Connect to an Essbase application used as a data store for a Planning application

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-25

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Creating FDM Applications

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Creating FDM Applications

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

When you create an application, a relational database for the application is automatically created. If you are using SQL Server, the database user that you specify must be either a SQL Server administrator or have database creator and bulk insert rights. If you are using Oracle, the database user that you specify must have either the Database Creator role or the following system privileges: • Create Procedure • Create Sequence • Create Session

e l c

• Create Table

a r O

• Create Trigger • Create View • Create Query Rewrite

A-26

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

To create FDM applications: 1. In Internet Explorer, enter the following URL: http:///HyperionFDM/ The Login dialog box is displayed. 2. In the Application list, select . 3. Enter admin as the user name and password as the password, and click Logon. The New Application dialog box is displayed. 4. On the General tab, enter the requested information. 5. On the Database tab, enter the requested information and click OK. The application folders and database are created. 6. At the “Application Successfully Created” prompt, click OK.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-27

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Installing Standard Reports After you install the standard reports, they are displayed on the Reports tab in Workbench.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Installing Standard Reports

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You import standard reports into your test application from Workbench. After you install FDM, the standard reports file FinancialDataManagementReports1112.zip is located in the Oracle_Home/Middleware/EPMSystem11R1/products/FinancialDataQuality/Share dComponents directory. The ZIP file contains the following: • StandardReportsOracle1112000Active.xml—For use with Oracle databases and the Active Reports viewer • StandardReportsSQLServer1112000Active.xml—For use with SQL databases and the Active Reports viewer

e l c

Extract the ZIP file contents before installing standard reports.

a r O A-28

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

To install standard reports: 1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Financial Data Quality Management, then Workbench, and then Workbench client. The Workbench Configuration dialog box is displayed. 2. Select the Reports tab. 3. Select File, and then Import. 4. Browse to select the standard reports file: • For applications that use SQL Server, select the StandardReportsSQLServer1112Active.xml file. • For applications that use Oracle, select the StandardReportsOracle1112Active.xml file. 5. Click Open. The Import dialog box is displayed. 6. On the General tab, select Reports, and click OK. The imported reports are displayed on the Reports tab.

y m

7. Select File, and then Exit.

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-29

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Copying Standard Templates You can verify that templates were successfully copied by viewing them in the Web client.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Copying Standard Templates

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You copy these files to the Templates folder of your test application. After you install FDM, the standard templates file FinancialDataManagementTemplates1112.zip is located in the Oracle_Home/Middleware/EPMSystem11R1/products/FinancialDataQuality/Share dComponents directory. Extract the ZIP file into the Application_Name/Outbox/Templates directory before installing standard templates. To install standard templates:

e l c

1. In your browser, enter the following URL: http:///HyperionFDM/

a r O A-30

The Login dialog box is displayed.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

2. In the Application list, select your test application. 3. In the User Name text box, enter the administrator user name. 4. In the Password text box, enter the password. 5. In the Domain text box, enter the domain. 6. Click Logon. The Web client is displayed. 7. In the navigation pane, select Tools, and then Templates. The standard templates are listed. 8. Close your browser.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-31

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Installing the Essbase Adapter Adapters are displayed on the Integration Adapters tab in Workbench after you import them.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Installing the Essbase Adapter

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

Adapters are predefined software components that communicate with various source and target applications. Each adapter is programmed to integrate with a specific source (SAP or SQL, for example) or target system (Essbase Services, Planning, for example). In this release, you use the ES11X-G4-G adapter to integrate with Planning and Essbase. Adapter components:

• EXE—Contains all instructions for FDM to communicate with the specified source and target applications. Planning uses upsES11XG4G.exe. • XML—Contains data relating to the FDM application that is being integrated. It stores application setup parameters and scripts to call API functions and return the results from the target application. You use ES11X-G4-G.xml as the XML file for Planning and Essbase Services.

e l c

a r O A-32

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

You must create a machine profile for each adapter XML component. The machine profile contains the information to allow FDM to determine the location of the source and target database servers. The machine profile also stores global logon information for connecting to the target application. To install and register the Essbase adapter: 1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Financial Data Quality Management, then Workbench, and then Workbench client. The Workbench Configuration dialog box is displayed. 2. Select the Adapters tab. 3. Select File, and then Import. The Open Import File dialog box is displayed. 4. Browse to the ES11X-G4-G.xml file, select it, and click Open. 5. Select Integration Adapters, and click OK. 6. Select the Options tab, and as preferred, select or clear the following options: • Save existing machine profile

e d a

• Remove all report groups before updating reports • Import maps with locations 7. Click OK.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

c A

8. From the Workbench desktop, select File, and then Register Adapter. 9. From the list, select the upsES11XG4G.exe and click Open. The Essbase adapter is registered with FDM.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-33

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Connecting to Planning

Identifies the target system. Identifies the application for the connection.

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Connecting to Planning

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

You connect your test application to Planning by configuring the application and integration settings in the Web client. You specify the following adapter options to integrate with Planning: • System Code—Select the application setting used to identify Planning as the target system. • Options—Select the Application Name integration setting to identify the Planning application that you want to connect to. • Essbase DB Name—Enter the name of the database used by the Essbase application to which you are loading data.

e l c

• Logon Method—Specify whether to use a unified or global logon method.

a r O

For a complete list of adapter options, see the Oracle® Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management, Fusion Edition Adapter for Hyperion Essbase Readme.

A-34

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

To connect to Planning: 1. In your browser, enter the URL http:///HyperionFDM/. The Login dialog box is displayed. 2. Log on to the test application that you created. 3. Select Administration, and then Application Settings. 4. In the System Code list, select ES11X-G4-G and click Save. 5. Select Administration, and then Integration Settings. 6. Enter the following information, and click Save. a. In the Option list, select Application Name. b. In the App Name text box, enter your application name. 7. In the Option list, select Logon Method. 8. In the Logon Method list, select one of the following options: • Select Unified if you want users to log on to the target application with the user name and password with which they logged on to FDM.

y m

• Select Global if you want users to log on to the target application with the same user name and password. Specify the user name and password for the target application, and select Global Logon Information from the Options list.

e d a

9. Click Save.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

10. Select Activities, and then Map to verify the connection.

c A

The mapping grid is displayed. 11. Click Add.

A row is added to the grid.

12. Double-click in the Target Account column.

13. In the drop-down menu, select Browse for Target Value.

A list of account members for the Account dimension of the Comma application is displayed. 14. Click Cancel.

e l c

15. Select File, and then Exit.

a r O

16. Close your browser.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-35

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Working with ERP Integrator • •

Creating the ERP Integrator master repository Creating logical schemas

• • •

Creating data servers and physical schemas Creating contexts Configuring ERP Integrator Work Repository

• • •

Creating a physical agent Importing scenarios Accessing ERP Integrator in Workspace

•

Registering an ERP Integrator source system

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Working with ERP Integrator

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

e d a

c A

To use ERP Integrator, you must:

• Have a working copy of Oracle Data Integrator.

• Have successfully installed and configured ERP using EPM System Installer and EPM System Configurator. • Have created the following three schemas for ERP Integrator in your database and assigned appropriate roles or rights for the users or resources for each schema: - Master Repository - Work Repository

e l c

- EPM System

a r O A-36

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

The following sections discuss these topic items: • Creating the ERP Integrator Master Repository • Creating Logical Schemas • Creating Data Servers and Physical Schemas • Creating Contexts • Configuring ERP Integrator Work Repository • Creating a Physical Agent • Importing Scenarios • Accessing ERP Integrator in Workspace • Registering an ERP Integrator Source System The source and target schemas used in the following topics are for sample purposes.

Creating the ERP Integrator Master Repository You create the master repository by using Master Repository Creation Wizard. The wizard creates the tables and imports the definitions for the different technologies. To create the ERP Integrator Master Repositor y:

y m

e d a

c A

1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle, then Oracle Data Integrator, then Repository Management, and then Master Repository Creation.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Master Repository Creation Wizard is displayed.

2. In the Driver field, click the ellipsis (...) button to select the driver from a list. 3. In the Drivers window, select Oracle JDBC Driver from the drop-down list, and click OK. 4. In the URL field, click the ellipsis (...) button to select the URL from a list. 5. In the URL examples window, select jdbc:oracle:thin@:: from the drop-down list, and click OK. 6. In the URL string, replace the values for , , and with the entries corresponding to the database used for the master repository. 7. In the User and Password fields, enter the master repository user name and password for the schema that you created, and click Test Connection.

e l c

a r O

8. Verify that the connection was made successfully, and click OK.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-37

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

9. Click OK. 10. In the ID field, enter an ID for the master repository. 11. From the Technology list, select Oracle, and click OK. The master repository is created. This process may take several minutes to finish. 12. Verify that the master repository was created successfully, and click OK to close the wizard.

Creating Logical Schemas After defining the master repository, you enter logical schema names for each related technology type. You must define schemas for AIF_TGT, AIF_FILE, one source (either PSFT_APPS or EBS_APPS), and one target (either HPL_TGT or HFM_TGT). After defining the schemas, you can hide unused technologies so that the displayed list is shorter. To create logical schemas:

y m

1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle, then Oracle Data Integrator, and then Topology Manager.

e d a

2. On the login page, enter the user name and password of the ODI administrator and click OK.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

NOTE: By default, the user name is SUPERVISOR and the password is SUNOPSIS. The user name and password are case-sensitive. Topology Manager is displayed.

3. In Topology Manager, select the Logical Architecture tab. 4. Expand Technologies.

5. In the Technologies list, right-click Oracle and select Insert Logical Schema. 6. In the name field, enter EBS_APPS, and click OK.

7. In the Technologies list, right-click Oracle and select Insert Logical Schema.

e l c

8. In the name field, enter PSFT_APPS and click OK.

a r O

9. In the Technologies list, right-click Oracle and select Insert Logical Schema.

A-38

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

10. In the name field, enter AIF_TGT and click OK. 11. In the Technologies list, right-click File and select Insert Logical Schema. 12. In the name field, enter AIF_FILE and click OK. 13. In the Technologies list, right-click Hyperion Planning and select Insert Logical Schema. 14. In the name field, enter HPL_TGT and click OK. 15. In the Technologies list, right-click Hyperion Financial Management and select Insert Logical Schema. 16. In the name field, enter HFM_TGT and click OK. The logical schemas are created.

Creating Data Servers and Physical Schemas You must associate logical schemas with physical schemas for a specific context. A physical schema is defined as part of a data server definition. You must define six mandatory physical schemas. You can enter dummy connection information for any technology that your organization does not use.

y m

To create data ser vers and physical schemas:

e d a

1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle, then Oracle Data Integrator, and then Topology Manager.

c A

2. On the login page, enter the user name and password of the ODI administrator and click OK.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

NOTE: By default, the user name is SUPERVISOR and the password is SUNOPSIS. The user name and password are case-sensitive. Topology Manager is displayed.

3. In Topology Manager, select the Physical Architecture tab. 4. Expand Technologies.

5. In the Technologies list, right-click Hyperion Planning and select Insert Data Server.

e l c

The Data Server: New dialog box is displayed.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-39

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

6. Perform one of the following actions: • Enter the Planning server name and all necessary connection information. and click OK. • Enter the Planning RMI Server name and port in : format, and click OK. 7. Click OK.

Creating Contexts Contexts bring together components of the physical architecture of the information system and components of the ODI logical architecture (the architecture on which the user works). You must create a context for the six mandatory logical schemas. To create contexts: 1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle, then Oracle Data Integrator, and then Topology Manager. 2. On the login screen, enter the user name and password of the ODI administrator, and click OK.

y m

e d a

NOTE: By default, the user name is SUPERVISOR and the password is SUNOPSIS. The user name and password are case-sensitive.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Topology Manager is displayed.

c A

3. In Topology Manager, select the Contexts tab.

4. Right-click anywhere on the Context tab, and select Insert Context. The Context:New dialog box is displayed. 5. Enter the context name and code. 6. Leave the password blank.

NOTE: This context is referenced when setting up each source system in ERP Integrator.

e l c

a r O

7. Relate the physical schemas to the logical schemas for each context on the Context tab, Physical Architecture tab, or Logical Architecture tab. In all cases, assign a physical schema to a logical schema for a selected context.

A-40

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Configuring the ERP Integrator Work Repository The work repository contains information about your data models and projects. You create a work repository with ODI Topology Manager. To configure the ERP Integrator Work Repositor y: 1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle, then Oracle Data Integrator, and then Topology Manager. 2. On the login screen, enter the user name and password of the ODI administrator and click OK. NOTE: By default, the user name is SUPERVISOR and the password is SUNOPSIS. The user name and password are case-sensitive. Topology Manager is displayed. 3. In Topology Manager, select the Repositories tab.

y m

4. Right-click Work Repositories, and select Insert Work Repository.

e d a

5. Define the connection information, and test the connection to make sure all information entered is correct. When finished, click OK.

c A

6. Enter the name for the work repository connection and the following information: • ID: A typical installation uses the ID—10 for the master repository, and the ID—20 for the work repository. Enter 20 for the ID.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Type: Select Execution.

• Name: Enter the work repository name. The name is displayed in the list of work repositories and is also referenced in the source system setup in ERP Integrator. 7. Click OK.

Creating a Physical Agent

The ODI agent is a Java application that can be placed as a listener on a TCP/IP port to handle the communication between the ERP Integrator components and the ODI components.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-41

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

To create a physical agent: 1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle, then Oracle Data Integrator, and then Topology Manager. 2. On the login screen, enter the user name and password of the ODI administrator and click OK. NOTE: By default, the user name is SUPERVISOR and the password is SUNOPSIS. The user name and password are case-sensitive. Topology Manager is displayed. 3. In Topology Manager, select the Physical Architecture tab. 4. Right-click Agents, and select Insert Agent. The Agent:New dialog box is displayed. 5. Enter the server name, host, and port.

y m

NOTE: This information is required when you set up the source system in ERP Integrator.

e d a

6. Click OK.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

The agent is created.

c A

Importing Scenarios

ODI modules are shipped as a set of compiled components, called scenarios. When you install ERP Integrator, scenarios are automatically installed in MIDDLEWARE_HOME\EPMSystem11R1\products\FinancialDataQuality\odi\scenario s. As part of the configuration process, you must import these scenarios into ODI. To import scenarios:

1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle, then Oracle Data Integrator, and then Operator.

e l c

2. On the login screen, enter the user name and password of the ODI administrator and click OK.

a r O A-42

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

NOTE: By default, the user name is SUPERVISOR and the password is SUNOPSIS. The user name and password are case-sensitive. ODI Operator is displayed. 3. Select File, then Import, and then Import Scenario. 4. Select the import type: Synonym Mode Insert_Update. 5. Select the file import directory: MIDDLEWARE_HOME\EPMSystem11R1\products\FinancialDataQuality\odi\scenarios. 6. Select the files to import, and click OK.

Accessing ERP Integrator in Workspace You must redeploy the Workspace Web service before you can access ERP Integrator through Workspace.

y m

To access ERP Integrator in Workspace:

1. Ensure that services for Shared Services, Workspace, Performance Management Architect, and ERP Integrator are started.

e d a

2. Depending on your integration with ERP Integrator, start the services for the following:

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

• Financial Management

c A

• Planning and Planning RMI Server • FDM

• Essbase (required for Planning) and Essbase Administration Services 3. In your Web browser, access ERP Integrator through Workspace by entering the following URL: http://Web_Server:port/workspace/

4. Enter your user name and password, and click Log On.

e l c

5. Select Navigate, then Administer, and then ERP Integrator.

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-43

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Registering an ERP Integrator Source System You can use ERP Integrator to extract data and metadata from multiple general ledger instances. ERP Integrator supports E-Business Suite and PeopleSoft system types. To register an ERP Integrator Source System: 1. Log on to Workspace. 2. Select Navigate, then Administer, and then ERP Integrator. 3. In ERP Integrator, select Administration, then Source System Registration. 4. Click Add Source System. 5. In Source System Details, perform the following actions: a. In the Name field, enter the source system name. b. In the Type drop-down box, select a source type. 6. In ODI Details, perform the following actions: a. In the Agent Host field, enter the name of the ODI agent. b. In the Agent Port field, enter the TCP/IP port for the ODI agent.

e d a

c. In the Context Code field, enter the name of the Context you created. d. In the JDBC Driver field, enter the driver code. e. In the JDBL URL field, enter the driver URL code.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

y m

c A

f. In the Log Level field, enter the level of detail that you want to capture in the logs, with 0 being the least detailed and 5 being the most detailed. g. In the User field, enter the database schema user name for the ODI master repository. h. In the Password field, enter the database schema password for the ODI master repository. i. In the Repository code field, enter the work repository name. 7. Click Save.

8. Select the source system that you created, and click Initialize.

e l c

a r O

If the initialization is successful, the system provides a Process ID. If the initialization is not successful, the system returns an error.

9. Verify that a Process ID is displayed.

A-44

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • List integration options • Describe Outline Load Utility, Oracle Data Integrator, Data Integration Management, FDM, and Enterprise Resource Planning Integrato • Install FDM and ERP Integrator • Configure FDM and ERP Integrator • Create applications in FDM

y m

• Work with ERP Integrator

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A-45

Appendix A

Integrating with Planning

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O A-46

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

A P P E N D I X

B

Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator

A

Objectives At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Describe Performance Management Architect File Generator • Create an import file from Planning applications • Create an import file from Performance Management Architect applications • Create an import file from Microsoft Excel files

y m

e d a

a r O

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

Appendix B

Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator

Performance Management Architect File Generator Overview You can create import files from the following sources: • Financial Management applications and files • • •

Planning applications Performance Management applications Microsoft Excel files

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Performance Management Architect File Generator Overview

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

Performance Management Architect File Generator is a utility that enables you to create import files from the following sources: • Existing Financial Management files such as PER, SEC and XML metadata files. NOTE: Only Financial Management XML format metadata files are supported. The APP format is not directly supported, but users can extract metadata from the system in the XML format to use the converter. • Existing Financial Management applications, Release 11.1.1 or later

e l c

• Existing Planning applications, Release 11.1.1 or later

a r O

• Existing Performance Management Architect applications (Consolidation, Planning, and Generic types), Release 11.1.1 or later • Microsoft Excel files

B-2

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix B

Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator

The File Generator utility reads these source files and generates an import file in ADS format, which can then be imported into Performance Management Architect. This can be helpful if you have a classic application that you want to migrate to Performance Management Architect without performing an application upgrade. In the utility, you can click Help to access the File Generator User's Guide.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

B-3

Appendix B

Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator

Creating an Import File from Planning Applications

y m

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

e d a

c A

Creating an Import File from Planning Applications

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

You can create an import file from an existing Planning application. To create an import file from a Planning application: 1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Foundation Services, then Performance Management Architect, and then Start EPMA File Generator. 2. Select the From Planning Application tab. 3. Enter the following information:

• User Name: The name of the application owner or Planning administrator.

e l c

• Password: The password for this user.

a r O

• Workspace URL: The URL of the Workspace Web application; for example, http://:19000:/workspace.

• Planning Web URL: The URL of the Planning Web server; for example, http://:8300/HyperionPlanning.

B-4

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix B

Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator

• Planning Application: The application for which you want to create the import file. • Application Server: The server on which this application is stored. • EPMA Import File: Specify the name or browse for an existing file to overwrite. 4. Optional: Click View to view the import file in a text editor. 5. Optional: Enter a prefix for the dimensions. 6. Optional: Click Save Metadata file. When Performance Management Architect imports an application, it is imported as an XML file (metadata.xml). Performance Management Architect runs the transformation and creates an ADS file from the metadata.xml file. Typically, this file is used for troubleshooting purposes. Oracle recommends that you do not select this option for extremely large applications. 7. Click Execute. The import file is created.

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

B-5

Appendix B

Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator

Creating an Import File from Performance Management Architect Applications

You can extract the entire Shared Library by entering “Master” as the application name. Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

y m

e d a

c A

Creating an Import File from Performance Management Architect Applications

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

You can create an import file from Consolidation (Financial Management), Planning, and Generic application types. This can be useful for transferring Performance Management Architect applications from one environment to another (for example, from a development environment to a testing environment) without using Lifecycle Management. To create an import file from a Performance Management Architect application: 1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Foundation Services, then Performance Management Architect, and then Start EPMA File Generator.

e l c

a r O

2. Select the From EPMA Application tab.

B-6

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix B

Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator

3. Enter the following information: • User Name: The name of the application owner or Performance Management Architect administrator. • Password: The password for this user. • EPMA Web Services URL: The URL of the Performance Management Architect Web server; for example, http:///hyperion-bpma-server. • EPMA Application: The application for which you want to create the import file. TIP: You can extract the entire Shared Library by entering Master in this field. • EPMA Import File: Specify the name or browse for an existing file to overwrite. 4. Optional: Click View to view the import file in a text editor. 5. Optional: Enter a prefix for the dimensions.

y m

6. Optional: Click Save Metadata file.

e d a

When Performance Management Architect imports an application, it is imported as an XML file (metadata.xml). Performance Management Architect runs the transformation and creates an ADS file from the metadata.xml file. Typically, this file is used for troubleshooting purposes. Oracle recommends that you do not select this option for extremely large applications. 7. Click Execute.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

The import file is created.

e l c

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

B-7

Appendix B

Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator

Creating an Import File from Microsoft Excel Files

Enter the name of the Excel file and then click Execute to launch Excel and create or edit dimensions and members. Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

y m

e d a

c A

Creating an Import File from Microsoft Excel Files

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

You can create an import file from a Microsoft Excel file. In the Excel file, you can create new dimensions and edit dimension and member properties. You can also define aliases and dimension hierarchies, and set dimension associations in the Excel file. You must enter languages in the Alias sheet before creating dimensions in the workbook because the utility automatically creates extra columns in the dimension sheet. This way, you can enter the aliases for members in the same row. If you add languages after creating dimensions, you must manually add extra columns for member aliases.

e l c

a r O B-8

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix B

Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator

To generate an *.ads file with aliases perform the following tasks: 1. For each dimension sheet, change the Alias column header from "Alias" to "Default" (do not include quotation marks). 2. Modify any additional aliases at the end of the columns by adding new ones in the format Alias=English, Alias=French (each in a separate column). It is important that all aliases are referenced in the Alias sheet. 3. After entering the members for each dimension and association, use File Generator to generate the *.ads flat file. 4. In the generated *.ads flat file, verify that all aliases are represented as entered in the Excel worksheet. To create an import file from a Microsoft Excel file: 1. Select Start, then Programs, then Oracle EPM System, then Foundation Services, then Performance Management Architect, and then Start EPMA File Generator. 2. Select the From EXCEL File tab.

y m

3. Enter the path and file name of the Excel file that you want to create.

e d a

4. Optional: Click Save Metadata file.

When Performance Management Architect imports an application, it is imported as an XML file (metadata.xml). Performance Management Architect runs the transformation and creates an ADS file from the metadata.xml file. Typically, this file is used for troubleshooting purposes. Oracle recommends that you do not select this option for extremely large applications.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

5. Click Execute to launch Excel and open the file.

NOTE: You must enable macros when you open the file. The Excel workbook is created with two existing sheets: Alias and Dimension Association. For each workbook, there can be only one sheet for Alias and one sheet for Dimension Association.

e l c

6. On the Alias sheet, enter the language alias to be used. 7. Select EPMA Utilities, and then Manage Dimensions.

a r O

Dimension Manager is displayed.

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

B-9

Appendix B

Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator

TIP: In Excel 2007, you may need to click Add-Ins to access EPMA Utilities. 8. Select one or more application types for which you want to create dimensions. Selecting the application type determines what member properties are displayed in the columns of the dimension sheet. If you select Consolidation, only member properties from the consolidation category are displayed. If you select all application types, all member properties from all categories are displayed. 9. Select the dimensions that you want to create. 10. Click Create. For each dimension that you create, a sheet is added to the Excel workbook. For each dimension sheet, column headers in Row 1 of the sheet are dimension properties. Column headers in Row 4 of the sheet are member properties. 11. Enter dimension members and member properties for each dimension. Enter dimension members in the parent and name columns. For the top-level member of a dimension, enter #root in the parent column.

y m

e d a

12. Select EPMA Utilities, and then Dimension Association.

c A

13. In the Target Dimension column, select the cell and, from the drop-down list, select the dimension.

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

14. Select EPMA Utilities, and then Generate Flat File.

15. Select the type of file delimiter to use in the file. 16. Click Generate Flat File.

17. Click Save Flat File to save the file in ADS format. To delete dimensions:

1. Select the dimension worksheet.

2. select EPMA Utilities, and then Delete Dimension 3. Select the dimension that you want to delete.

e l c

4. Click Delete.

a r O B-10

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

Appendix B

Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator

Summary In this lesson, you should have learned to: • Describe Performance Management Architect File Generator • Create an import file from Planning applications • Create an import file from Performance Management Architect applications • Create an import file from Microsoft Excel files

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration

B-11

Appendix B

Working with the Performance Management Architect File Generator

y m

e d a

e l c

e l c a r O ly & On l a e n r s e t U n I

c A

a r O B-12

Planning 11.1.2: Installation and Configuration